11773 lines
372 KiB
TeX
11773 lines
372 KiB
TeX
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
||
%
|
||
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\def\texinfoversion{2020-10-24.12}
|
||
%
|
||
% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
||
%
|
||
% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
|
||
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
||
% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
|
||
% License, or (at your option) any later version.
|
||
%
|
||
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
||
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
||
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
||
% General Public License for more details.
|
||
%
|
||
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
||
% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
||
%
|
||
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
|
||
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
|
||
% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
|
||
% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
|
||
%
|
||
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
||
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
||
% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
|
||
% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
|
||
% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
|
||
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
|
||
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
||
%
|
||
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include a
|
||
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
||
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
||
%
|
||
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
||
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
||
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
||
% tex foo.texi
|
||
% texindex foo.??
|
||
% tex foo.texi
|
||
% tex foo.texi
|
||
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
|
||
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
|
||
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
||
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
||
%
|
||
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
|
||
% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
|
||
% full Texinfo distribution.
|
||
%
|
||
% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
||
|
||
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
||
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
||
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
||
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
||
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
||
|
||
% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for
|
||
% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex.
|
||
\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}%
|
||
|
||
\chardef\other=12
|
||
|
||
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
|
||
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
||
\let\+ = \relax
|
||
|
||
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
|
||
\let\ptexb=\b
|
||
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
||
\let\ptexc=\c
|
||
\let\ptexcomma=\,
|
||
\let\ptexdot=\.
|
||
\let\ptexdots=\dots
|
||
\let\ptexend=\end
|
||
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
||
\let\ptexexclam=\!
|
||
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
||
\let\ptexgtr=>
|
||
\let\ptexhat=^
|
||
\let\ptexi=\i
|
||
\let\ptexindent=\indent
|
||
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
|
||
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
||
\let\ptexless=<
|
||
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
|
||
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
|
||
\let\ptexplus=+
|
||
\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
|
||
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
||
\let\ptexslash=\/
|
||
\let\ptexsp=\sp
|
||
\let\ptexstar=\*
|
||
\let\ptexsup=\sup
|
||
\let\ptext=\t
|
||
\let\ptextop=\top
|
||
{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
|
||
|
||
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
||
% starts a new line in the output.
|
||
\newlinechar = `^^J
|
||
|
||
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
||
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
||
\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
|
||
\else
|
||
\def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
||
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
||
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
||
|
||
% Give the space character the catcode for a space.
|
||
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax}
|
||
|
||
% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character.
|
||
\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax}
|
||
|
||
\chardef\dashChar = `\-
|
||
\chardef\slashChar = `\/
|
||
\chardef\underChar = `\_
|
||
|
||
% Ignore a token.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\gobble#1{}
|
||
|
||
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
|
||
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
||
|
||
% Hyphenation fixes.
|
||
\hyphenation{
|
||
Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
|
||
ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
|
||
data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
|
||
man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
|
||
par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
|
||
spell-ing spell-ings
|
||
stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
|
||
wide-spread wrap-around
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
||
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
||
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
|
||
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
|
||
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
||
\def\loggingall{%
|
||
\tracingstats2
|
||
\tracingpages1
|
||
\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
|
||
\tracingparagraphs1
|
||
\tracingoutput1
|
||
\tracingmacros2
|
||
\tracingrestores1
|
||
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
||
\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
|
||
\tracingscantokens1
|
||
\tracingifs1
|
||
\tracinggroups1
|
||
\tracingnesting2
|
||
\tracingassigns1
|
||
\fi
|
||
\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
|
||
\errorcontextlines16
|
||
}%
|
||
|
||
% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
|
||
% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
|
||
% after all.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
|
||
\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
|
||
|
||
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
|
||
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
|
||
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
|
||
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
|
||
\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
|
||
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
|
||
\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
|
||
|
||
% Output routine
|
||
%
|
||
|
||
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
||
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
||
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
|
||
|
||
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
||
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
||
|
||
% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
|
||
% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
|
||
% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
|
||
%
|
||
% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
|
||
% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
|
||
%
|
||
% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
|
||
% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
|
||
% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.
|
||
|
||
% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one
|
||
% mark before the section break, and one after.
|
||
% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs,
|
||
% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs.
|
||
% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous
|
||
% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section
|
||
% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top.
|
||
% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark.
|
||
%
|
||
% See page 260 of The TeXbook.
|
||
\def\domark{%
|
||
\toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}%
|
||
\toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}%
|
||
\toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
|
||
\toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
|
||
\toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}%
|
||
\mark{%
|
||
\the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top
|
||
\noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom
|
||
\noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks,
|
||
% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark.
|
||
%
|
||
% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
|
||
% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
|
||
% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
|
||
% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
|
||
% first @chapter.
|
||
\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
|
||
\ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi
|
||
\ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
|
||
\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi}
|
||
|
||
% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
|
||
\def\currentchapterdefs{}
|
||
\def\currentsectiondefs{}
|
||
\def\currentsection{}
|
||
\def\prevchapterdefs{}
|
||
\def\prevsectiondefs{}
|
||
\def\currentcolordefs{}
|
||
|
||
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
||
\newdimen\bindingoffset
|
||
\newdimen\normaloffset
|
||
\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight
|
||
|
||
% Main output routine.
|
||
%
|
||
\chardef\PAGE = 255
|
||
\newtoks\defaultoutput
|
||
\defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
||
\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
|
||
|
||
\newbox\headlinebox
|
||
\newbox\footlinebox
|
||
|
||
% When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine
|
||
% is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This
|
||
% can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading
|
||
% of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of
|
||
% the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually
|
||
% \shipout a page.
|
||
%
|
||
% (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and
|
||
% \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page
|
||
% containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown
|
||
% away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.)
|
||
%
|
||
\newtoks\savedtopmark
|
||
\newif\iftopmarksaved
|
||
\topmarksavedtrue
|
||
\def\savetopmark{%
|
||
\iftopmarksaved\else
|
||
\global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}%
|
||
\global\topmarksavedtrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.
|
||
% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer
|
||
% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written
|
||
% to the auxiliary files.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\onepageout#1{%
|
||
\hoffset=\normaloffset
|
||
%
|
||
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
||
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\checkchapterpage
|
||
%
|
||
% Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page,
|
||
% and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the
|
||
% values in \headline and \footline.
|
||
%
|
||
% Common context changes for both heading and footing.
|
||
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
||
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
||
\def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars}
|
||
%
|
||
\ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
|
||
\global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
|
||
\ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
|
||
\global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}%
|
||
%
|
||
{%
|
||
% Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files.
|
||
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
||
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
||
% before the \shipout runs.
|
||
%
|
||
\atdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\shipout\vbox{%
|
||
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
|
||
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\unvbox\headlinebox
|
||
\pagebody{#1}%
|
||
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
||
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
||
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
|
||
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
||
\vskip 24pt
|
||
\unvbox\footlinebox
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\global\topmarksavedfalse
|
||
\advancepageno
|
||
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
||
|
||
% Main part of page, including any footnotes
|
||
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
||
{\catcode`\@ =11
|
||
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
||
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
||
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
||
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
||
\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
|
||
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
||
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings.
|
||
\newif\ifchapterpage
|
||
\def\checkchapterpage{%
|
||
% Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page
|
||
\ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi
|
||
\let\prevchaptername\thischaptername
|
||
%
|
||
\ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
|
||
\let\curchaptername\thischaptername
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername
|
||
\chapterpagefalse
|
||
\else
|
||
\chapterpagetrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Argument parsing
|
||
|
||
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
||
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
||
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
||
% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
|
||
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
|
||
\def\argtorun{#2}%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\obeylines
|
||
\spaceisspace
|
||
#1%
|
||
\parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
{\obeylines %
|
||
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
||
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
||
\argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to
|
||
% \argcheckspaces.
|
||
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
|
||
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
|
||
|
||
% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
|
||
%
|
||
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
|
||
% @end itemize @c foo
|
||
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
|
||
% by \finishparsearg.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
|
||
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
|
||
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
|
||
\def\temp{#3}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\empty
|
||
% Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
|
||
\let\temp\finishparsearg
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\temp\argcheckspaces
|
||
\fi
|
||
% Put the space token in:
|
||
\temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
|
||
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
|
||
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
|
||
% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
|
||
% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
|
||
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
|
||
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
|
||
%
|
||
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line
|
||
%
|
||
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
|
||
% is roughly equivalent to
|
||
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
|
||
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
|
||
\def\parseargdef#1{%
|
||
\expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
|
||
\def#2{\parsearg#1}%
|
||
\def#1##1%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Several utility definitions with active space:
|
||
{
|
||
\obeyspaces
|
||
\gdef\obeyedspace{ }
|
||
|
||
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
||
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
||
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
||
% should produce a line of output anyway.
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
|
||
|
||
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
||
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
||
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
||
\gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
||
|
||
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
|
||
%
|
||
% \envdef\foo{...}
|
||
% \def\Efoo{...}
|
||
%
|
||
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
|
||
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
|
||
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
|
||
% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
|
||
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
|
||
%
|
||
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
|
||
% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
|
||
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
|
||
% special case.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
% At run-time, environments start with this:
|
||
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
|
||
% initialize
|
||
\let\thisenv\empty
|
||
|
||
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
|
||
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
||
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
||
|
||
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
|
||
\def\checkenv#1{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
||
\else
|
||
\badenverr
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
|
||
\def\badenverr{%
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
|
||
not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\inenvironment#1{%
|
||
\ifx#1\empty
|
||
outside of any environment%
|
||
\else
|
||
in environment \expandafter\string#1%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
||
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\end{%
|
||
\if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
|
||
\else
|
||
% The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
|
||
\expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
|
||
\csname E#1\endcsname
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
||
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
||
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
||
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
||
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
||
{\catcode`@ = 11
|
||
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
||
% if the definition is written into an index file.
|
||
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
||
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
||
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
||
|
||
% @* forces a line break.
|
||
\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
||
|
||
% @/ allows a line break.
|
||
\let\/=\allowbreak
|
||
|
||
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
||
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
||
|
||
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
||
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
||
|
||
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
||
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
||
|
||
% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\onword{on}
|
||
\def\offword{off}
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
||
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
||
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
||
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
||
|
||
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
||
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
||
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
||
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
||
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
||
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
||
% the text is small, which looks bad.
|
||
%
|
||
% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
|
||
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
|
||
% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
|
||
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
|
||
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
|
||
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
|
||
%
|
||
\newbox\groupbox
|
||
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
|
||
%
|
||
\envdef\group{%
|
||
\ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
|
||
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
||
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\startsavinginserts
|
||
%
|
||
\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
|
||
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
||
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
||
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
||
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
||
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
||
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
||
\comment
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
|
||
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
|
||
% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
||
% above. But it's pretty close.
|
||
\def\Egroup{%
|
||
% To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
|
||
% and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
|
||
\endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
|
||
\global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
|
||
\egroup % End the \vtop.
|
||
\addgroupbox
|
||
\prevdepth = \dimen1
|
||
\checkinserts
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\addgroupbox{
|
||
% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
|
||
\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
|
||
% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
|
||
\dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
|
||
% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
|
||
% group, force a page break.
|
||
\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
|
||
\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight
|
||
\page
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\box\groupbox
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
||
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
||
%
|
||
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
||
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
||
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
||
|
||
% @need space-in-mils
|
||
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
||
|
||
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\need{%
|
||
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
||
% paragraph.
|
||
\par
|
||
%
|
||
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
||
\dimen0 = #1\mil
|
||
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
||
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
||
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
||
%
|
||
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
||
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
||
% And a page break here is fine.
|
||
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
||
%
|
||
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
||
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
||
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
||
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
||
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
||
%
|
||
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
||
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
||
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
||
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
||
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
||
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
||
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
||
\penalty9999
|
||
%
|
||
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
||
\kern -#1\mil
|
||
%
|
||
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
|
||
|
||
\let\br = \par
|
||
|
||
% @page forces the start of a new page.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
||
|
||
% @exdent text....
|
||
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
||
|
||
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
||
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
||
\newskip\exdentamount
|
||
|
||
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
||
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
|
||
|
||
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
||
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
||
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
||
|
||
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
|
||
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
|
||
% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
|
||
%
|
||
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
||
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
\kern-\strutdepth
|
||
\vtop to \strutdepth{%
|
||
\baselineskip=\strutdepth
|
||
\vss
|
||
% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
|
||
% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
|
||
\ifx#1l%
|
||
\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\null
|
||
}%
|
||
}}
|
||
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
|
||
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
|
||
%
|
||
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
|
||
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
|
||
% else use TEXT for both).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
|
||
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
||
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
||
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
|
||
\def\righttext{#2}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
|
||
\def\righttext{#1}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\ifodd\pageno
|
||
\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
|
||
\else
|
||
\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\temp
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
|
||
\def\includezzz#1{%
|
||
\pushthisfilestack
|
||
\def\thisfile{#1}%
|
||
{%
|
||
\makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
|
||
\turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
|
||
\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
||
\wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
|
||
\edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
|
||
%
|
||
% This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
|
||
% definitions, etc.
|
||
\expandafter
|
||
}\temp
|
||
\popthisfilestack
|
||
}
|
||
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
|
||
\catcode`\\=\other
|
||
\catcode`~=\other
|
||
\catcode`^=\other
|
||
\catcode`_=\other
|
||
\catcode`|=\other
|
||
\catcode`<=\other
|
||
\catcode`>=\other
|
||
\catcode`+=\other
|
||
\catcode`-=\other
|
||
\catcode`\`=\other
|
||
\catcode`\'=\other
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
|
||
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
|
||
}
|
||
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
|
||
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
|
||
}
|
||
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
|
||
\gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
|
||
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
|
||
the stack of filenames is empty.}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\thisfile{}
|
||
|
||
% @center line
|
||
% outputs that line, centered.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\center{%
|
||
\ifhmode
|
||
\let\centersub\centerH
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\centersub\centerV
|
||
\fi
|
||
\centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
|
||
\let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
|
||
}
|
||
\def\centerH#1{{%
|
||
\hfil\break
|
||
\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
||
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
||
\line{#1}%
|
||
\break
|
||
}}
|
||
%
|
||
\newcount\centerpenalty
|
||
\def\centerV#1{%
|
||
% The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
|
||
% @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
|
||
% out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
|
||
% prevent a page break here.
|
||
\centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
|
||
\ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
|
||
\ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
|
||
\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
||
|
||
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
||
% @c is the same as @comment
|
||
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
||
|
||
|
||
\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active%
|
||
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
||
\cxxx}
|
||
{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
||
%
|
||
\let\comment\c
|
||
|
||
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
||
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
||
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
|
||
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
||
\def\noneword{none}
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
||
\defaultparindent = 0pt
|
||
\else
|
||
\defaultparindent = #1em
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @exampleindent NCHARS
|
||
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
||
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
||
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
||
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
||
\lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
||
\else
|
||
\lispnarrowing = #1em
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
|
||
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
|
||
% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
|
||
% paragraphs.
|
||
%
|
||
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
|
||
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
|
||
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
|
||
% By default, we suppress indentation.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
||
\def\insertword{insert}
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
||
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\insertword
|
||
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
|
||
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
|
||
%
|
||
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
|
||
% paragraph.
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
|
||
\gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
|
||
\gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
|
||
\global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
|
||
\global\let\indent = \ptexindent
|
||
\global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent
|
||
\global\everypar = {}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @refill is a no-op.
|
||
\let\refill=\relax
|
||
|
||
% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored
|
||
\let\setfilename=\comment
|
||
|
||
% @bye.
|
||
\outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{pdf,}
|
||
% adobe `portable' document format
|
||
\newcount\tempnum
|
||
\newcount\lnkcount
|
||
\newtoks\filename
|
||
\newcount\filenamelength
|
||
\newcount\pgn
|
||
\newtoks\toksA
|
||
\newtoks\toksB
|
||
\newtoks\toksC
|
||
\newtoks\toksD
|
||
\newbox\boxA
|
||
\newbox\boxB
|
||
\newcount\countA
|
||
\newif\ifpdf
|
||
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
% For LuaTeX
|
||
%
|
||
|
||
\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname
|
||
\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc.
|
||
|
||
\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
|
||
\else
|
||
% Use Unicode destination names
|
||
\txiuseunicodedestnametrue
|
||
% Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\%=12
|
||
\directlua{
|
||
function UTF16oct(str)
|
||
tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377')
|
||
for c in string.utfvalues(str) do
|
||
if c < 0x10000 then
|
||
tex.sprint(
|
||
string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
|
||
string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
|
||
math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256)))
|
||
else
|
||
c = c - 0x10000
|
||
local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800
|
||
local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00
|
||
tex.sprint(
|
||
string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
|
||
string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
|
||
string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
|
||
string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
|
||
math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256),
|
||
math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256)))
|
||
end
|
||
end
|
||
end
|
||
}
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
|
||
% Escape PDF strings without converting
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\directlua{
|
||
function PDFescstr(str)
|
||
for c in string.bytes(str) do
|
||
if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then
|
||
tex.sprint(-2,
|
||
string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
|
||
c))
|
||
else
|
||
tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c))
|
||
end
|
||
end
|
||
end
|
||
}
|
||
% The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12
|
||
% (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See
|
||
% https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html
|
||
%
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
|
||
\ifnum\luatexversion>84
|
||
% For LuaTeX >= 0.85
|
||
\def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest}
|
||
\let\pdfoutput\outputmode
|
||
\def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal}
|
||
\def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog}
|
||
\def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax}
|
||
\let\pdfximage\saveimageresource
|
||
\let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource
|
||
\let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex
|
||
\def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax}
|
||
\def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline}
|
||
\def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink}
|
||
\def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr}
|
||
\def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj}
|
||
\def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax}
|
||
\let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth
|
||
\let\pdfpageheight\pageheight
|
||
\edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin}
|
||
\edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin}
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
|
||
% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
|
||
\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifcase\pdfoutput
|
||
\else
|
||
\pdftrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
\newif\ifpdforxetex
|
||
\pdforxetexfalse
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
\pdforxetextrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else
|
||
\pdforxetextrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Output page labels information.
|
||
% See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1.
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
\def\pagelabels{%
|
||
\def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}%
|
||
\edef\roman{\the\romancount << /S /r >>}%
|
||
\edef\arabic{\the\arabiccount << /S /D >>}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Page label ranges must be increasing. Remove any duplicates.
|
||
% (There is a slight chance of this being wrong if e.g. there is
|
||
% a @contents but no @titlepage, etc.)
|
||
%
|
||
\ifnum\romancount=0 \def\roman{}\fi
|
||
\ifnum\arabiccount=0 \def\title{}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifnum\romancount=\arabiccount \def\roman{}\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\ifnum\romancount<\arabiccount
|
||
\pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \roman \arabic ] >> }\relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \arabic \roman ] >> }\relax
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\pagelabels\relax
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
\newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0
|
||
\newcount\romancount \romancount=0
|
||
\newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
\let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno
|
||
\def\advancepageno{%
|
||
\ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1
|
||
}
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
|
||
% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
|
||
% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
|
||
% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
|
||
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
|
||
%
|
||
% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
|
||
% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
|
||
% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
|
||
% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
|
||
% do this reliably, so we use it.
|
||
|
||
% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
|
||
% which we \xdef.
|
||
\def\txiescapepdf#1{%
|
||
\ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
|
||
% No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
|
||
% Many times it won't matter.
|
||
\xdef#1{#1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
% The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
|
||
% backslashes, and other special chars.
|
||
\xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{%
|
||
\ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined
|
||
% No UTF-16 converting macro available.
|
||
\txiescapepdf{#1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
|
||
with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
|
||
be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
|
||
output) for that.)}
|
||
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
%
|
||
% Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
|
||
% except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
|
||
% very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
|
||
% of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
|
||
% nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use
|
||
% black by default, though.
|
||
\def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
|
||
\def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
|
||
%
|
||
% rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
|
||
% RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
|
||
\def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
|
||
%
|
||
% Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
|
||
% so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
|
||
\def\setcolor#1{%
|
||
\xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
|
||
\domark
|
||
\pdfsetcolor{#1}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
|
||
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
|
||
\edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
|
||
\def\currentcolordefs{}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\makefootline{%
|
||
\baselineskip24pt
|
||
\line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\makeheadline{%
|
||
\vbox to 0pt{%
|
||
\vskip-22.5pt
|
||
\line{%
|
||
\vbox to8.5pt{}%
|
||
% Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
|
||
\getcolormarks
|
||
% Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
|
||
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\vss
|
||
}%
|
||
\nointerlineskip
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
%
|
||
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
|
||
%
|
||
% #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
|
||
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
||
\def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
||
\def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
||
%
|
||
% pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
|
||
% others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
|
||
% someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
|
||
% bitmap.
|
||
\let\pdfimgext=\empty
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
|
||
\errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
|
||
\errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
|
||
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
%
|
||
% without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
|
||
% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
|
||
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
||
\immediate\pdfimage
|
||
\else
|
||
\immediate\pdfximage
|
||
\fi
|
||
\ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
|
||
\ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
|
||
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
|
||
#1.\pdfimgext
|
||
\else
|
||
{#1.\pdfimgext}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
||
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
||
\fi}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
|
||
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
||
% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\iftxiuseunicodedestname
|
||
\ifx \declaredencoding \latone
|
||
% Pass through Latin-1 characters.
|
||
% LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode.
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
||
% Pass through Unicode characters.
|
||
\else
|
||
% Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
|
||
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
% Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
|
||
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
||
\fi
|
||
\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
||
\txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
|
||
}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\ifx \declaredencoding \latone
|
||
% The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark
|
||
% strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for
|
||
% the "PDFDocEncoding".
|
||
\passthroughcharstrue
|
||
% Pass through Latin-1 characters.
|
||
% LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode
|
||
% pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
|
||
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
||
\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
|
||
% For pdfTeX with UTF-8.
|
||
% TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings,
|
||
% but the code for this isn't done yet.
|
||
% Use ASCII approximations.
|
||
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
||
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
% For LuaTeX with UTF-8.
|
||
% Pass through Unicode characters for title texts.
|
||
\passthroughcharstrue
|
||
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
% For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings.
|
||
% Use ASCII approximations.
|
||
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
||
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
% LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16
|
||
% pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
|
||
\txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext
|
||
}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\pdfmkdest#1{%
|
||
\setpdfdestname{#1}%
|
||
\safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% used to mark target names; must be expandable.
|
||
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
|
||
%
|
||
% by default, use black for everything.
|
||
\def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
|
||
\def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
|
||
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
|
||
%
|
||
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
||
% come from Petr Olsak
|
||
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
||
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
||
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
||
\advance\tempnum by 1
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
||
%
|
||
% #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
|
||
% outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
|
||
% of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
|
||
% which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
|
||
% #4 is the page number
|
||
%
|
||
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
||
% Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
|
||
% page number. We could generate a destination for the section
|
||
% text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
|
||
% seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
|
||
\setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
|
||
\setpdfdestname{#3}
|
||
\ifx\pdfdestname\empty
|
||
\def\pdfdestname{#4}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
% Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
|
||
\def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
|
||
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\def\thischapnum{##2}%
|
||
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
||
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
|
||
\def\thissecnum{##2}%
|
||
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
|
||
\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\def\thischapnum{0}%
|
||
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
||
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
||
%
|
||
% use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
|
||
% al. a second time, below.
|
||
\def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
|
||
\def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
||
\def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
||
\def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
||
\def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
|
||
\def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
||
\def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
||
\def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
||
\readdatafile{toc}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
|
||
% The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
|
||
% subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
|
||
%
|
||
% We use the node names as the destinations.
|
||
%
|
||
% Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
|
||
% for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
|
||
% horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
|
||
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
\def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
|
||
% document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
|
||
% since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
|
||
% Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
|
||
% Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
|
||
%
|
||
% TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
|
||
% their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
|
||
% much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
|
||
% we use for the index sort strings.
|
||
%
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\setupdatafile
|
||
% We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
|
||
% Texinfo index files. So set that up.
|
||
\def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
|
||
\def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
|
||
\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
||
\input \tocreadfilename
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}
|
||
{\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
|
||
\catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
|
||
\gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
|
||
\gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
|
||
]
|
||
%
|
||
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
||
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
||
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
||
\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
||
\advance\filenamelength by 1
|
||
\fi
|
||
\nextsp}
|
||
\def\getfilename#1{%
|
||
\filenamelength=0
|
||
% If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
|
||
% snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
|
||
\edef\temp{#1}%
|
||
\expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
|
||
}
|
||
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
||
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
||
\else
|
||
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
||
\fi
|
||
% make a live url in pdf output.
|
||
\def\pdfurl#1{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
||
% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
||
% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
||
% people have actually reported a problem with.
|
||
%
|
||
\normalturnoffactive
|
||
\def\@{@}%
|
||
\let\/=\empty
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
% do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
|
||
% special-casing \var here?
|
||
\def\var##1{##1}%
|
||
%
|
||
\leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
|
||
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
||
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
% \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may
|
||
% be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index
|
||
% entry.
|
||
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
||
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
||
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
||
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
||
\def\maketoks{%
|
||
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
||
\ifx\first0\adn0
|
||
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
||
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
||
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
||
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
||
\let\next=\maketoks
|
||
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
||
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
||
\next}
|
||
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
||
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
||
\def\pdflink#1{%
|
||
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
|
||
\setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
|
||
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
||
\else
|
||
% non-pdf mode
|
||
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
||
\let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
||
\let\endlink = \relax
|
||
\let\setcolor = \gobble
|
||
\let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
|
||
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
||
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
% For XeTeX
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
||
\else
|
||
%
|
||
% XeTeX version check
|
||
%
|
||
\ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1
|
||
% TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307.
|
||
% It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941).
|
||
% For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special
|
||
% instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
|
||
\special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010}
|
||
% XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+.
|
||
% It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF.
|
||
\txiuseunicodedestnametrue
|
||
\else
|
||
% XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the
|
||
% `dvipdfmx:config' special.
|
||
% So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement,
|
||
% xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary.
|
||
%
|
||
% XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF
|
||
% because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue.
|
||
% It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
|
||
\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Color support
|
||
%
|
||
\def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
|
||
\def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}}
|
||
%
|
||
% Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
|
||
% so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
|
||
\def\setcolor#1{%
|
||
\xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
|
||
\domark
|
||
\pdfsetcolor{#1}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
|
||
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
|
||
\edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
|
||
\def\currentcolordefs{}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\makefootline{%
|
||
\baselineskip24pt
|
||
\line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\makeheadline{%
|
||
\vbox to 0pt{%
|
||
\vskip-22.5pt
|
||
\line{%
|
||
\vbox to8.5pt{}%
|
||
% Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
|
||
\getcolormarks
|
||
% Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
|
||
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\vss
|
||
}%
|
||
\nointerlineskip
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% PDF outline support
|
||
%
|
||
% Emulate pdfTeX primitive
|
||
\def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{%
|
||
\special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
|
||
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
||
% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\iftxiuseunicodedestname
|
||
% Pass through Unicode characters.
|
||
\else
|
||
% Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
|
||
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
||
\fi
|
||
\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
||
\txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
|
||
}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
% Always use Unicode characters in title texts.
|
||
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
||
% For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16.
|
||
% So we do not convert.
|
||
\txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
|
||
}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\pdfmkdest#1{%
|
||
\setpdfdestname{#1}%
|
||
\safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% by default, use black for everything.
|
||
\def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
|
||
\def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
|
||
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
||
\setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
|
||
\setpdfdestname{#3}
|
||
\ifx\pdfdestname\empty
|
||
\def\pdfdestname{#4}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A
|
||
<< /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
%
|
||
% For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary.
|
||
% Therefore, we read toc only once.
|
||
%
|
||
% We use node names as destinations.
|
||
%
|
||
% Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
|
||
% for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
|
||
% horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
|
||
\def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
|
||
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\let\appentry\numchapentry%
|
||
\let\appsecentry\numsecentry%
|
||
\let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
|
||
\let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
|
||
\def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
||
\dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
|
||
\let\unnsecentry\numsecentry%
|
||
\let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
|
||
\let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
|
||
%
|
||
% For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
|
||
% Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered.
|
||
%
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\setupdatafile
|
||
% We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
|
||
% Texinfo index files. So set that up.
|
||
\def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
|
||
\def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
|
||
\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
||
\input \tocreadfilename
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}
|
||
{\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
|
||
\catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
|
||
\gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
|
||
\gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
|
||
]
|
||
|
||
\special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> }
|
||
% ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary
|
||
% because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it.
|
||
% However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315,
|
||
% ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings.
|
||
% It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
||
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
||
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
||
\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
||
\advance\filenamelength by 1
|
||
\fi
|
||
\nextsp}
|
||
\def\getfilename#1{%
|
||
\filenamelength=0
|
||
% If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
|
||
% snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
|
||
\edef\temp{#1}%
|
||
\expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
|
||
}
|
||
% make a live url in pdf output.
|
||
\def\pdfurl#1{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
||
% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
||
% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
||
% people have actually reported a problem with.
|
||
%
|
||
\normalturnoffactive
|
||
\def\@{@}%
|
||
\let\/=\empty
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
% do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
|
||
% special-casing \var here?
|
||
\def\var##1{##1}%
|
||
%
|
||
\leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
|
||
\special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
|
||
/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}%
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}}
|
||
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
||
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
||
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
||
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
||
\def\maketoks{%
|
||
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
||
\ifx\first0\adn0
|
||
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
||
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
||
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
||
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
||
\let\next=\maketoks
|
||
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
||
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
||
\next}
|
||
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
||
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
||
\def\pdflink#1{%
|
||
\special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
|
||
/Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}%
|
||
\setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
|
||
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
||
%
|
||
%
|
||
% @image support
|
||
%
|
||
% #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
|
||
\def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{%
|
||
\def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
||
\def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
||
%
|
||
% XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
|
||
% others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
|
||
% someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
|
||
% bitmap.
|
||
\let\xeteximgext=\empty
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
|
||
\openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
|
||
\errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}%
|
||
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
%
|
||
\def\xetexpdfext{pdf}%
|
||
\ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
|
||
\XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
|
||
\else
|
||
\def\xetexpdfext{PDF}%
|
||
\ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
|
||
\XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
|
||
\else
|
||
\XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi
|
||
\ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax
|
||
}
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
\message{fonts,}
|
||
|
||
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
||
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
||
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
||
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
||
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
||
%
|
||
% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
|
||
\def\baselinefactor{1}
|
||
%
|
||
\newdimen\textleading
|
||
\def\setleading#1{%
|
||
\dimen0 = #1\relax
|
||
\normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
|
||
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
||
\normalbaselines
|
||
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
||
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
||
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
|
||
%
|
||
% do nothing with this by default.
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
|
||
|
||
% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
|
||
% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
|
||
% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
|
||
\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
||
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
||
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
||
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
||
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
|
||
%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
|
||
%%Version: 1.000
|
||
%%EndComments
|
||
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
||
12 dict begin
|
||
begincmap
|
||
/CIDSystemInfo
|
||
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
||
/Ordering (OT1)
|
||
/Supplement 0
|
||
>> def
|
||
/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
|
||
/CMapType 2 def
|
||
1 begincodespacerange
|
||
<00> <7F>
|
||
endcodespacerange
|
||
8 beginbfrange
|
||
<00> <01> <0393>
|
||
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
||
<23> <26> <0023>
|
||
<28> <3B> <0028>
|
||
<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
||
<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
||
<61> <7A> <0061>
|
||
<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
||
endbfrange
|
||
40 beginbfchar
|
||
<02> <0398>
|
||
<03> <039B>
|
||
<04> <039E>
|
||
<05> <03A0>
|
||
<06> <03A3>
|
||
<07> <03D2>
|
||
<08> <03A6>
|
||
<0B> <00660066>
|
||
<0C> <00660069>
|
||
<0D> <0066006C>
|
||
<0E> <006600660069>
|
||
<0F> <00660066006C>
|
||
<10> <0131>
|
||
<11> <0237>
|
||
<12> <0060>
|
||
<13> <00B4>
|
||
<14> <02C7>
|
||
<15> <02D8>
|
||
<16> <00AF>
|
||
<17> <02DA>
|
||
<18> <00B8>
|
||
<19> <00DF>
|
||
<1A> <00E6>
|
||
<1B> <0153>
|
||
<1C> <00F8>
|
||
<1D> <00C6>
|
||
<1E> <0152>
|
||
<1F> <00D8>
|
||
<21> <0021>
|
||
<22> <201D>
|
||
<27> <2019>
|
||
<3C> <00A1>
|
||
<3D> <003D>
|
||
<3E> <00BF>
|
||
<5C> <201C>
|
||
<5F> <02D9>
|
||
<60> <2018>
|
||
<7D> <02DD>
|
||
<7E> <007E>
|
||
<7F> <00A8>
|
||
endbfchar
|
||
endcmap
|
||
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
||
end
|
||
end
|
||
%%EndResource
|
||
%%EOF
|
||
}\endgroup
|
||
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
|
||
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
||
}%
|
||
%
|
||
% \cmapOT1IT
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
||
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
||
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
||
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
||
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
|
||
%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
|
||
%%Version: 1.000
|
||
%%EndComments
|
||
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
||
12 dict begin
|
||
begincmap
|
||
/CIDSystemInfo
|
||
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
||
/Ordering (OT1IT)
|
||
/Supplement 0
|
||
>> def
|
||
/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
|
||
/CMapType 2 def
|
||
1 begincodespacerange
|
||
<00> <7F>
|
||
endcodespacerange
|
||
8 beginbfrange
|
||
<00> <01> <0393>
|
||
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
||
<25> <26> <0025>
|
||
<28> <3B> <0028>
|
||
<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
||
<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
||
<61> <7A> <0061>
|
||
<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
||
endbfrange
|
||
42 beginbfchar
|
||
<02> <0398>
|
||
<03> <039B>
|
||
<04> <039E>
|
||
<05> <03A0>
|
||
<06> <03A3>
|
||
<07> <03D2>
|
||
<08> <03A6>
|
||
<0B> <00660066>
|
||
<0C> <00660069>
|
||
<0D> <0066006C>
|
||
<0E> <006600660069>
|
||
<0F> <00660066006C>
|
||
<10> <0131>
|
||
<11> <0237>
|
||
<12> <0060>
|
||
<13> <00B4>
|
||
<14> <02C7>
|
||
<15> <02D8>
|
||
<16> <00AF>
|
||
<17> <02DA>
|
||
<18> <00B8>
|
||
<19> <00DF>
|
||
<1A> <00E6>
|
||
<1B> <0153>
|
||
<1C> <00F8>
|
||
<1D> <00C6>
|
||
<1E> <0152>
|
||
<1F> <00D8>
|
||
<21> <0021>
|
||
<22> <201D>
|
||
<23> <0023>
|
||
<24> <00A3>
|
||
<27> <2019>
|
||
<3C> <00A1>
|
||
<3D> <003D>
|
||
<3E> <00BF>
|
||
<5C> <201C>
|
||
<5F> <02D9>
|
||
<60> <2018>
|
||
<7D> <02DD>
|
||
<7E> <007E>
|
||
<7F> <00A8>
|
||
endbfchar
|
||
endcmap
|
||
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
||
end
|
||
end
|
||
%%EndResource
|
||
%%EOF
|
||
}\endgroup
|
||
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
|
||
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
||
}%
|
||
%
|
||
% \cmapOT1TT
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
||
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
||
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
||
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
||
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
|
||
%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
|
||
%%Version: 1.000
|
||
%%EndComments
|
||
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
||
12 dict begin
|
||
begincmap
|
||
/CIDSystemInfo
|
||
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
||
/Ordering (OT1TT)
|
||
/Supplement 0
|
||
>> def
|
||
/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
|
||
/CMapType 2 def
|
||
1 begincodespacerange
|
||
<00> <7F>
|
||
endcodespacerange
|
||
5 beginbfrange
|
||
<00> <01> <0393>
|
||
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
||
<21> <26> <0021>
|
||
<28> <5F> <0028>
|
||
<61> <7E> <0061>
|
||
endbfrange
|
||
32 beginbfchar
|
||
<02> <0398>
|
||
<03> <039B>
|
||
<04> <039E>
|
||
<05> <03A0>
|
||
<06> <03A3>
|
||
<07> <03D2>
|
||
<08> <03A6>
|
||
<0B> <2191>
|
||
<0C> <2193>
|
||
<0D> <0027>
|
||
<0E> <00A1>
|
||
<0F> <00BF>
|
||
<10> <0131>
|
||
<11> <0237>
|
||
<12> <0060>
|
||
<13> <00B4>
|
||
<14> <02C7>
|
||
<15> <02D8>
|
||
<16> <00AF>
|
||
<17> <02DA>
|
||
<18> <00B8>
|
||
<19> <00DF>
|
||
<1A> <00E6>
|
||
<1B> <0153>
|
||
<1C> <00F8>
|
||
<1D> <00C6>
|
||
<1E> <0152>
|
||
<1F> <00D8>
|
||
<20> <2423>
|
||
<27> <2019>
|
||
<60> <2018>
|
||
<7F> <00A8>
|
||
endbfchar
|
||
endcmap
|
||
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
||
end
|
||
end
|
||
%%EndResource
|
||
%%EOF
|
||
}\endgroup
|
||
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
|
||
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
|
||
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
|
||
% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
|
||
% Example:
|
||
% #1 = \textrm
|
||
% #2 = \rmshape
|
||
% #3 = 10
|
||
% #4 = \mainmagstep
|
||
% #5 = OT1
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
||
\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
|
||
\csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
|
||
}
|
||
% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
|
||
\let\cmap\gobble
|
||
%
|
||
% (end of cmaps)
|
||
|
||
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
||
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
||
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
||
\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
|
||
\def\fontprefix{cm}
|
||
\fi
|
||
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
||
\def\rmshape{r}
|
||
\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
|
||
\def\bfshape{b}
|
||
\def\bxshape{bx}
|
||
\def\ttshape{tt}
|
||
\def\ttbshape{tt}
|
||
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
||
\def\itshape{ti}
|
||
\def\itbshape{bxti}
|
||
\def\slshape{sl}
|
||
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
||
\def\sfshape{ss}
|
||
\def\sfbshape{ss}
|
||
\def\scshape{csc}
|
||
\def\scbshape{csc}
|
||
|
||
% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
|
||
%
|
||
\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
|
||
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
|
||
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
|
||
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
|
||
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
||
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
||
\def\textecsize{1095}
|
||
|
||
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
||
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
||
\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
|
||
\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf}
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
||
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
||
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
||
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
||
\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
||
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
||
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
||
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
||
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
|
||
\def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
|
||
\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\seveni=cmmi7
|
||
\font\sevensy=cmsy7
|
||
\def\sevenecsize{0700}
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
||
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
||
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
||
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
||
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
||
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
||
\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
||
|
||
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
||
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
|
||
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
||
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
||
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
||
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
||
\def\chapecsize{1728}
|
||
|
||
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
||
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
|
||
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\let\secbf\secrm
|
||
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
||
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
||
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
||
\def\sececsize{1440}
|
||
|
||
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
||
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
|
||
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
||
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
||
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
||
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
||
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
||
\def\ssececsize{1200}
|
||
|
||
% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt).
|
||
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
|
||
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
|
||
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
|
||
\def\reducedecsize{1000}
|
||
|
||
\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
|
||
\textfonts % reset the current fonts
|
||
\rm
|
||
} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
|
||
% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
|
||
% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
|
||
% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\definetextfontsizex{%
|
||
% Text fonts (10pt).
|
||
\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
|
||
\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
|
||
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
||
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
||
\def\textecsize{1000}
|
||
|
||
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
||
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
||
\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
|
||
\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf}
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
||
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
||
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
||
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
||
\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
||
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
||
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
||
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
||
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
|
||
\def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
|
||
\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\seveni=cmmi7
|
||
\font\sevensy=cmsy7
|
||
\def\sevenecsize{0700}
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
||
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
||
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
||
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
||
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
||
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
||
\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
||
|
||
% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
|
||
\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
|
||
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\let\chapbf\chaprm
|
||
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
||
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
||
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
||
\def\chapecsize{1440}
|
||
|
||
% Section fonts (12pt).
|
||
\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
|
||
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\let\secbf\secrm
|
||
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
||
\font\seci=cmmi12
|
||
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
|
||
\def\sececsize{1200}
|
||
|
||
% Subsection fonts (10pt).
|
||
\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
|
||
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
||
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\font\sseci=cmmi10
|
||
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
|
||
\def\ssececsize{1000}
|
||
|
||
% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt).
|
||
\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
|
||
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
||
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
||
\font\reducedi=cmmi9
|
||
\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
|
||
\def\reducedecsize{0900}
|
||
|
||
\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
|
||
\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
|
||
\textfonts % reset the current fonts
|
||
\rm
|
||
} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
|
||
|
||
% Fonts for short table of contents.
|
||
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
|
||
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% We provide the user-level command
|
||
% @fonttextsize 10
|
||
% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\xiword{11}
|
||
\def\xword{10}
|
||
\def\xwordpt{10pt}
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
|
||
\def\textsizearg{#1}%
|
||
%\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
|
||
% makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
|
||
%
|
||
\begingroup \globaldefs=1
|
||
\ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
|
||
\else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp=\EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
|
||
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
|
||
% italics, not bold italics.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
|
||
\def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
|
||
\csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
|
||
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
|
||
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
|
||
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
|
||
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}\def\ttstylename{tt}
|
||
|
||
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
||
% So we set up a \sf.
|
||
\newfam\sffam
|
||
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
|
||
|
||
% We don't need math for this font style.
|
||
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
||
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.
|
||
% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\resetmathfonts{%
|
||
\textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont
|
||
\textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont
|
||
\textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont
|
||
%
|
||
% Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless
|
||
% of the current font size.
|
||
\scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy
|
||
\scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl
|
||
\scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt
|
||
\scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
|
||
% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings
|
||
% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs
|
||
% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm)
|
||
% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font.
|
||
%
|
||
% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics
|
||
% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only.
|
||
%
|
||
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
|
||
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used
|
||
% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
|
||
%
|
||
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
|
||
%
|
||
|
||
\def\assignfonts#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newif\ifrmisbold
|
||
|
||
% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size
|
||
% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for
|
||
% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size.
|
||
\def\switchtolllsize{%
|
||
\expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}%
|
||
\ifrmisbold
|
||
\let\rmfont\bffont
|
||
\fi
|
||
\csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
|
||
}%
|
||
|
||
\def\switchtolsize{%
|
||
\expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}%
|
||
\ifrmisbold
|
||
\let\rmfont\bffont
|
||
\fi
|
||
\csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
|
||
}%
|
||
|
||
\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
||
\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{%
|
||
\def\curfontsize{#1}%
|
||
\def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}%
|
||
\csname rmisbold#5\endcsname
|
||
\assignfonts{#1}%
|
||
\resetmathfonts
|
||
\setleading{#4}%
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false}
|
||
\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true}
|
||
\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true}
|
||
\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true}
|
||
\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true}
|
||
\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
|
||
\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
|
||
\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false}
|
||
|
||
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
|
||
\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts
|
||
\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts
|
||
|
||
% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
||
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
||
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
||
|
||
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
|
||
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
|
||
|
||
% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
|
||
% can fit this many characters:
|
||
% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
|
||
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
|
||
% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
|
||
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
|
||
% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
|
||
%
|
||
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
|
||
% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
|
||
% --karl, 24jan03.
|
||
|
||
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
||
%
|
||
\definetextfontsizexi
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{markup,}
|
||
|
||
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
||
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
||
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
||
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
||
|
||
% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
|
||
% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
|
||
% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
|
||
% style.
|
||
|
||
\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
|
||
|
||
\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
|
||
\def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
|
||
\markupstylesetup
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\let\markupstylesetup\empty
|
||
|
||
\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
|
||
\expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
|
||
\def#1%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
|
||
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
|
||
\csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
||
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
|
||
\csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
||
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`\'=\active
|
||
\catcode`\`=\active
|
||
|
||
\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
|
||
\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
|
||
|
||
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
|
||
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
||
\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
|
||
%
|
||
\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
||
\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
|
||
%
|
||
\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
||
\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright
|
||
%
|
||
\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
||
\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
|
||
%
|
||
\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
||
\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
|
||
%
|
||
\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
||
\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
|
||
|
||
% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
|
||
% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
|
||
% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
|
||
% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
|
||
% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\codequoteright{%
|
||
\ifmonospace
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
||
'%
|
||
\else \char'15 \fi
|
||
\else \char'15 \fi
|
||
\else
|
||
'%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
|
||
% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
|
||
% the code environments to do likewise.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\codequoteleft{%
|
||
\ifmonospace
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
||
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
|
||
% \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
||
\relax`%
|
||
\else \char'22 \fi
|
||
\else \char'22 \fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\relax`%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Commands to set the quote options.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\onword
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
|
||
= t%
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\offword
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
|
||
= \relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\onword
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
|
||
= t%
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\offword
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
|
||
= \relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
||
\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
|
||
|
||
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
||
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
||
|
||
% Font commands.
|
||
|
||
% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
|
||
% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
|
||
% and 2) do not add an italic correction.
|
||
\def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
|
||
\ifusingtt
|
||
{{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
|
||
{\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
|
||
\next
|
||
}
|
||
\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
|
||
\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
|
||
|
||
% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
|
||
% character) is such as not to need one.
|
||
\def\smartitaliccorrection{%
|
||
\ifx\next,%
|
||
\else\ifx\next-%
|
||
\else\ifx\next.%
|
||
\else\ifx\next\.%
|
||
\else\ifx\next\comma%
|
||
\else\ptexslash
|
||
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
||
\aftersmartic
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns.
|
||
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
|
||
|
||
% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
|
||
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
|
||
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
|
||
|
||
\def\aftersmartic{}
|
||
\def\var#1{%
|
||
\let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
|
||
\def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
|
||
\smartslanted{#1}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\let\i=\smartitalic
|
||
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
|
||
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
||
\let\emph=\smartitalic
|
||
|
||
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
||
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
||
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
||
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
||
|
||
% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
|
||
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
||
\let\strong=\b
|
||
|
||
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
|
||
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
|
||
|
||
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
||
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
||
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
||
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
||
|
||
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
||
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
|
||
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
|
||
%
|
||
\catcode`@=11
|
||
\def\plainfrenchspacing{%
|
||
\sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m
|
||
\sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m
|
||
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
|
||
}
|
||
\def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
|
||
\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
|
||
\sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
|
||
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
|
||
}
|
||
\catcode`@=\other
|
||
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
|
||
|
||
% @t, explicit typewriter.
|
||
\def\t#1{%
|
||
{\tt \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
||
\null
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @samp.
|
||
\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
|
||
|
||
% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
|
||
\let\indicateurl=\samp
|
||
|
||
% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
|
||
% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
|
||
% This is a subroutine for that.
|
||
\def\tclose#1{%
|
||
{%
|
||
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
||
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
||
%
|
||
% Switch to typewriter.
|
||
\tt
|
||
%
|
||
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
||
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Turn off hyphenation.
|
||
\nohyphenation
|
||
%
|
||
\plainfrenchspacing
|
||
#1%
|
||
}%
|
||
\null % reset spacefactor to 1000
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
|
||
% (But see \codedashfinish below.)
|
||
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
||
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
||
%
|
||
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
||
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
||
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
||
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
||
\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
|
||
\global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
|
||
%
|
||
\global\def\code{\begingroup
|
||
\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
|
||
% The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
|
||
\catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
|
||
\ifallowcodebreaks
|
||
\let-\codedash
|
||
\let_\codeunder
|
||
\else
|
||
\let-\normaldash
|
||
\let_\realunder
|
||
\fi
|
||
% Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
|
||
% after the hyphen.
|
||
\global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
|
||
%
|
||
\codex
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
|
||
\gdef\codedashfinish{%
|
||
\normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
|
||
%
|
||
% Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
|
||
% (a) the next character is a -, or
|
||
% (b) the preceding character is a -.
|
||
% E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
|
||
% Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
|
||
\ifx\next\codedash \else
|
||
\ifx\codedashprev\codedash
|
||
\else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
% we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
|
||
% space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
|
||
\global\let\codedashprev= \next
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
\def\normaldash{-}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
\def\codeunder{%
|
||
% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
|
||
% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
|
||
% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
|
||
% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
|
||
\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
|
||
\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
|
||
\else\normalunderscore \fi
|
||
\discretionary{}{}{}}%
|
||
{\_}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
|
||
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
|
||
% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
|
||
% and _ on and off.
|
||
%
|
||
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
|
||
|
||
\def\keywordtrue{true}
|
||
\def\keywordfalse{false}
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
|
||
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
|
||
\allowcodebreakstrue
|
||
\else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
|
||
\allowcodebreaksfalse
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
|
||
% so use \code rather than \samp.
|
||
\let\command=\code
|
||
\let\env=\code
|
||
\let\file=\code
|
||
\let\option=\code
|
||
|
||
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
|
||
% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
|
||
% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
|
||
% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
|
||
|
||
% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
|
||
% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
|
||
\newif\ifurefurlonlylink
|
||
|
||
% The default \pretolerance setting stops the penalty inserted in
|
||
% \urefallowbreak being a discouragement to line breaking. Set it to
|
||
% a negative value for this paragraph only. Hopefully this does not
|
||
% conflict with redefinitions of \par done elsewhere.
|
||
\def\nopretolerance{%
|
||
\pretolerance=-1
|
||
\def\par{\endgraf\pretolerance=100 \let\par\endgraf}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
|
||
% places within the url.
|
||
\def\urefbreak{\nopretolerance \begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
|
||
\let\uref=\urefbreak
|
||
%
|
||
\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
|
||
\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
|
||
\unsepspaces
|
||
\pdfurl{#1}%
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
||
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
||
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
||
\else
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
|
||
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
% For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
|
||
\ifurefurlonlylink
|
||
% PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
|
||
\unhbox0
|
||
\else
|
||
% PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
|
||
% visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
|
||
\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
||
\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url
|
||
\else
|
||
% For XeTeX
|
||
\ifurefurlonlylink
|
||
% PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
|
||
\unhbox0
|
||
\else
|
||
% PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
|
||
% visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
|
||
\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\endlink
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
|
||
\def\urefcatcodes{%
|
||
\catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active
|
||
\catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active
|
||
\catcode`\/=\active
|
||
}
|
||
{
|
||
\urefcatcodes
|
||
%
|
||
\global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
|
||
\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
|
||
\urefcatcodes
|
||
\let&\urefcodeamp
|
||
\let.\urefcodedot
|
||
\let#\urefcodehash
|
||
\let?\urefcodequest
|
||
\let/\urefcodeslash
|
||
\codex
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% By default, they are just regular characters.
|
||
\global\def&{\normalamp}
|
||
\global\def.{\normaldot}
|
||
\global\def#{\normalhash}
|
||
\global\def?{\normalquest}
|
||
\global\def/{\normalslash}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak}
|
||
\def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak}
|
||
\def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak}
|
||
\def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak}
|
||
\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`\/=\active
|
||
\global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
|
||
\urefprebreak \slashChar
|
||
% Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
|
||
% slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
|
||
\ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to
|
||
% break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at
|
||
% all, for manual control.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
|
||
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\txiarg\wordnone
|
||
\def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
|
||
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
|
||
\def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
|
||
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
|
||
\def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak}
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\wordafter{after}
|
||
\def\wordbefore{before}
|
||
\def\wordnone{none}
|
||
|
||
% Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can
|
||
% be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in
|
||
% the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty with extra glue added
|
||
% at the end of the line, or no break at all here.
|
||
% Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how
|
||
% preferable one choice is over the other.
|
||
\def\urefallowbreak{%
|
||
\penalty0\relax
|
||
\hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax
|
||
\penalty1000\relax
|
||
\hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\urefbreakstyle after
|
||
|
||
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
|
||
%
|
||
\let\url=\uref
|
||
|
||
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
||
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
||
%
|
||
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
||
\ifpdforxetex
|
||
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
||
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
||
\unsepspaces
|
||
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
||
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
||
\endlink
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\email=\uref
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
||
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
||
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
||
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
|
||
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
|
||
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
||
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
|
||
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
||
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
|
||
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
||
\def\wordexample{example}
|
||
\def\wordcode{code}
|
||
|
||
% Default is `distinct'.
|
||
\kbdinputstyle distinct
|
||
|
||
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
||
% then @kbd has no effect.
|
||
\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
|
||
|
||
\def\xkey{\key}
|
||
\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
|
||
\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
||
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
||
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
|
||
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
|
||
%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
||
%\font\keysy=cmsy9
|
||
%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
||
% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
||
% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
||
% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
||
% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
||
% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
||
|
||
% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
|
||
% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
|
||
% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
|
||
\nohyphenation
|
||
\ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
|
||
#1}\null}
|
||
|
||
% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
|
||
\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
|
||
\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
|
||
\def\click{\arrow}
|
||
|
||
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
||
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
||
|
||
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
|
||
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
|
||
% all-uppercase.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
|
||
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
||
{\switchtolsize #1}%
|
||
\def\temp{#2}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
||
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\null % reset \spacefactor=1000
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
|
||
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
|
||
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
||
{\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
||
\def\temp{#2}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
||
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\null % reset \spacefactor=1000
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\asis#1{#1}
|
||
|
||
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
|
||
%
|
||
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
|
||
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
|
||
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
|
||
% which is what @var uses.
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`\_ = \active
|
||
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
|
||
\catcode`\_=\active
|
||
\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
|
||
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
|
||
% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
|
||
%
|
||
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
|
||
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\math{%
|
||
\ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already
|
||
\tex
|
||
\mathunderscore
|
||
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
|
||
\mathactive
|
||
% make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
|
||
\let\"=\ddot
|
||
\let\'=\acute
|
||
\let\==\bar
|
||
\let\^=\hat
|
||
\let\`=\grave
|
||
\let\u=\breve
|
||
\let\v=\check
|
||
\let\~=\tilde
|
||
\let\dotaccent=\dot
|
||
% have to provide another name for sup operator
|
||
\let\mathopsup=\sup
|
||
$\expandafter\finishmath\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
|
||
|
||
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
|
||
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
|
||
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
|
||
%
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`^ = \active
|
||
\catcode`< = \active
|
||
\catcode`> = \active
|
||
\catcode`+ = \active
|
||
\catcode`' = \active
|
||
\gdef\mathactive{%
|
||
\let^ = \ptexhat
|
||
\let< = \ptexless
|
||
\let> = \ptexgtr
|
||
\let+ = \ptexplus
|
||
\let' = \ptexquoteright
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
|
||
% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
|
||
% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the
|
||
% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
|
||
% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
|
||
\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
|
||
%
|
||
\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
|
||
\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
|
||
|
||
% provide this command from LaTeX as it is very common
|
||
\def\frac#1#2{{{#1}\over{#2}}}
|
||
|
||
% @displaymath.
|
||
% \globaldefs is needed to recognize the end lines in \tex and
|
||
% \end tex. Set \thisenv as @end displaymath is seen before @end tex.
|
||
{\obeylines
|
||
\globaldefs=1
|
||
\envdef\displaymath{%
|
||
\tex
|
||
\def\thisenv{\displaymath}%
|
||
$$%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\Edisplaymath{$$
|
||
\def\thisenv{\tex}%
|
||
\end tex
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
|
||
% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
|
||
% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\outfmtnametex{tex}
|
||
%
|
||
\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
|
||
\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
|
||
\def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
|
||
% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
|
||
\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
|
||
\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
|
||
\def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
|
||
% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
|
||
% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
|
||
% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
|
||
% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
|
||
% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
|
||
% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
|
||
%
|
||
\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
|
||
\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
|
||
\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
|
||
\def\inlinerawname{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
|
||
\endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
|
||
%
|
||
\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
|
||
\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
|
||
\def\inlinevarname{#1}%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
|
||
\else\ignorespaces#2\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
|
||
%
|
||
\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
|
||
\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
|
||
\def\inlinevarname{#1}%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{glyphs,}
|
||
% and logos.
|
||
|
||
% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
|
||
\def\@{\char64 }
|
||
\let\atchar=\@
|
||
|
||
% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
|
||
\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}}
|
||
\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}}
|
||
\let\{=\lbracechar
|
||
\let\}=\rbracechar
|
||
|
||
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
|
||
\let\comma = ,
|
||
|
||
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
||
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
|
||
\let\, = \ptexc
|
||
\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
|
||
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
||
\let\tieaccent = \ptext
|
||
\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
|
||
\let\udotaccent = \d
|
||
|
||
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
|
||
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
|
||
\def\questiondown{?`}
|
||
\def\exclamdown{!`}
|
||
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}}
|
||
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}}
|
||
|
||
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
||
\def\imacro{i}
|
||
\def\jmacro{j}
|
||
\def\dotless#1{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
|
||
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
|
||
% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
|
||
%
|
||
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
|
||
|
||
% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
|
||
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
|
||
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
|
||
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
|
||
% \scriptscriptstyle).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\LaTeX{%
|
||
L\kern-.36em
|
||
{\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
|
||
\vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
|
||
\ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
|
||
% for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
|
||
% Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
|
||
\count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
|
||
\else
|
||
% For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
|
||
\switchtolllsize A%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}%
|
||
\vss
|
||
}}%
|
||
\kern-.15em
|
||
\TeX
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode
|
||
% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here,
|
||
% but safer, and can't hurt.
|
||
\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi}
|
||
\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet}
|
||
\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge}
|
||
\def\leq{\ensuremath\le}
|
||
\def\minus{\ensuremath-}
|
||
|
||
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
|
||
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
|
||
% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
|
||
% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
|
||
% whichever is larger.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\dots{%
|
||
\leavevmode
|
||
\setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
|
||
\ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
|
||
\dimen0 = \wd0
|
||
\else
|
||
\dimen0 = 1.5em
|
||
\fi
|
||
\hbox to \dimen0{%
|
||
\hskip 0pt plus.25fil
|
||
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
||
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
||
.\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\enddots{%
|
||
\dots
|
||
\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
||
%
|
||
% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
|
||
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\point{$\star$}
|
||
\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
||
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
||
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
||
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
||
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
||
|
||
% The @error{} command.
|
||
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
||
%
|
||
\newbox\errorbox
|
||
%
|
||
{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
||
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
||
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
|
||
%
|
||
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
||
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
||
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
||
\vbox{%
|
||
\hrule height\dimen2
|
||
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
||
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
||
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
||
\hrule height\dimen2}
|
||
\hfil}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
||
|
||
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\pounds{\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"BF}\else{\it\$}\fi}
|
||
|
||
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
|
||
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
|
||
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
|
||
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
|
||
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
|
||
%
|
||
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
|
||
% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
|
||
% font height.
|
||
%
|
||
% feymr - regular
|
||
% feymo - slanted
|
||
% feybr - bold
|
||
% feybo - bold slanted
|
||
%
|
||
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
|
||
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
|
||
% Hmm.
|
||
%
|
||
% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
|
||
% Hope not.
|
||
%
|
||
%
|
||
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
|
||
\def\eurofont{%
|
||
% We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
|
||
% \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
|
||
% installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
|
||
% font installed.
|
||
%
|
||
% There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
|
||
% that to the current nominal size.
|
||
%
|
||
% By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
|
||
% does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
||
% bold:
|
||
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
|
||
\else
|
||
% regular:
|
||
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
|
||
\fi
|
||
\thiseurofont
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
|
||
% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
|
||
% the redefinition.
|
||
%
|
||
% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
|
||
\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
|
||
\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
|
||
\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
|
||
\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
|
||
%
|
||
\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
|
||
\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
|
||
\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
|
||
\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
|
||
\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
|
||
\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
|
||
\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
|
||
\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
|
||
%
|
||
% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
|
||
% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
|
||
% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
|
||
% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
|
||
%
|
||
% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
|
||
% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
|
||
% the same EC font.
|
||
\def\ogonek#1{{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
|
||
\else
|
||
\ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
|
||
\ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
|
||
\else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
|
||
\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
|
||
\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
|
||
\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
|
||
%
|
||
% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format)
|
||
% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text
|
||
% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec
|
||
% package and follow the same conventions.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}}
|
||
\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\etcfont#1{%
|
||
% We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
|
||
% is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
|
||
% quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
|
||
% hopefully nobody will notice/care.
|
||
\edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
|
||
\edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
||
\ifmonospace
|
||
% typewriter:
|
||
\font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
||
% bold:
|
||
\font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
||
\else
|
||
% regular:
|
||
\font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\thisecfont
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
|
||
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
|
||
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\registeredsymbol{%
|
||
$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}%
|
||
\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
|
||
}$%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
|
||
|
||
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
|
||
% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
|
||
% so we'll define it if necessary.
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
|
||
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
% Quotes.
|
||
\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
|
||
\chardef\quoteright=`\'
|
||
|
||
% only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using
|
||
% \ecfont unless necessary.
|
||
\def\quotedblleft{%
|
||
\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"10}\else{\char"5C}\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\quotedblright{%
|
||
\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"11}\else{\char`\"}\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{page headings,}
|
||
|
||
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
||
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
||
|
||
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
||
\newif\ifseenauthor
|
||
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
||
|
||
% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or
|
||
% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete.
|
||
\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{%
|
||
\errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
|
||
command; move your @contents command if you want the contents
|
||
after the title page.}}%
|
||
\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{%
|
||
\errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
|
||
command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you
|
||
want the contents after the title page.}}%
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
|
||
\begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
||
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
||
|
||
\envdef\titlepage{%
|
||
% Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
||
% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
||
\vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
||
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
||
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
||
%
|
||
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
||
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
||
\let\oldpage = \page
|
||
\def\page{%
|
||
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
||
\finishtitlepage
|
||
\fi
|
||
\let\page = \oldpage
|
||
\page
|
||
\null
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\Etitlepage{%
|
||
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
||
\finishtitlepage
|
||
\fi
|
||
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
||
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
||
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
||
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
||
\oldpage
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
%
|
||
% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
|
||
% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
|
||
\HEADINGSon
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\finishtitlepage{%
|
||
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
||
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
||
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
|
||
% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
|
||
% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should
|
||
% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\raggedtitlesettings{%
|
||
\rm
|
||
\hyphenpenalty=10000
|
||
\parindent=0pt
|
||
\tolerance=5000
|
||
\ptexraggedright
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
|
||
|
||
\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont
|
||
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\title{%
|
||
\checkenv\titlepage
|
||
\vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
|
||
% print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
||
\finishedtitlepagefalse
|
||
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
|
||
\checkenv\titlepage
|
||
{\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
||
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\author{%
|
||
\def\temp{\quotation}%
|
||
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
||
\def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
|
||
\else
|
||
\checkenv\titlepage
|
||
\ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
|
||
{\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Set up page headings and footings.
|
||
|
||
\let\thispage=\folio
|
||
|
||
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
||
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
||
\newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter
|
||
\newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter
|
||
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
||
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
||
|
||
% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables
|
||
\headline={{\textfonts\rm
|
||
\ifchapterpage
|
||
\ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi
|
||
\fi}}
|
||
|
||
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
||
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
||
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
||
|
||
% Commands to set those variables.
|
||
% For example, this is what @headings on does
|
||
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
||
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
||
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
||
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
||
|
||
|
||
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
||
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
||
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
||
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}
|
||
\global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline}
|
||
|
||
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
||
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
||
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
||
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
||
\global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline}
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
||
|
||
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
||
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
||
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
||
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
||
|
||
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
||
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
||
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
||
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
||
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
||
\global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt
|
||
\global\advance\vsize by -12pt
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
||
|
||
% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
|
||
% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
|
||
%
|
||
% The same set of arguments for:
|
||
%
|
||
% @oddheadingmarks
|
||
% @evenfootingmarks
|
||
% @oddfootingmarks
|
||
% @everyheadingmarks
|
||
% @everyfootingmarks
|
||
|
||
% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks,
|
||
% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of
|
||
% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
|
||
\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
|
||
\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
|
||
\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
|
||
\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
|
||
\headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
|
||
\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
|
||
\headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
|
||
% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
|
||
\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
|
||
\global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\everyheadingmarks bottom
|
||
\everyfootingmarks bottom
|
||
|
||
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
||
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
||
% @headings off turns them off.
|
||
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
||
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
||
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
||
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
||
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
||
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
||
|
||
\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
|
||
\evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}%
|
||
\oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
|
||
\HEADINGSoff % it's the default
|
||
|
||
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
||
\def\pageone{
|
||
\global\pageno=1
|
||
\global\arabiccount = \pagecount
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
||
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
||
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
||
% edge of all pages.
|
||
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
|
||
\pageone
|
||
\HEADINGSdoublex
|
||
}
|
||
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
||
|
||
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
||
% page number on top right.
|
||
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
|
||
\pageone
|
||
\HEADINGSsinglex
|
||
}
|
||
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
||
|
||
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
||
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
||
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
||
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
||
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
||
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
||
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
||
\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil}}
|
||
\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
|
||
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
||
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
||
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
||
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
||
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
||
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
||
\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
|
||
\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
|
||
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% for @setchapternewpage off
|
||
\def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{%
|
||
\pageone
|
||
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
||
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
||
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
||
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
||
\global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline
|
||
\global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline
|
||
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Subroutines used in generating headings
|
||
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
||
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
|
||
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
|
||
\ifx\today\thisisundefined
|
||
\def\today{%
|
||
\number\day\space
|
||
\ifcase\month
|
||
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
||
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
||
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
||
\fi
|
||
\space\number\year}
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
||
% It generates no output of its own.
|
||
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
||
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{tables,}
|
||
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
|
||
|
||
% default indentation of table text
|
||
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
||
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
||
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
||
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
||
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
||
|
||
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
||
\newdimen\itemmax
|
||
|
||
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
||
% these defs.
|
||
% They also define \itemindex
|
||
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
||
|
||
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
||
|
||
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
||
|
||
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
||
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
||
|
||
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
||
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
||
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
||
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
|
||
\itemindex{#1}%
|
||
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
||
%
|
||
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
||
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
||
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
||
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
||
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
||
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
||
%
|
||
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
||
% but leave it ragged-right.
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
||
\advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
||
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
|
||
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
%
|
||
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
||
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
||
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
||
%
|
||
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
|
||
% what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
|
||
% \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
|
||
% cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
|
||
% bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
|
||
% \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
|
||
%
|
||
\penalty 10001
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
||
\else
|
||
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
||
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
||
\noindent
|
||
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
||
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
||
% eventually be printed.
|
||
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
||
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
||
\unhbox0
|
||
\nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
|
||
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
|
||
|
||
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
||
\envdef\table{%
|
||
\let\itemindex\gobble
|
||
\tablecheck{table}%
|
||
}
|
||
\envdef\ftable{%
|
||
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
|
||
\tablecheck{ftable}%
|
||
}
|
||
\envdef\vtable{%
|
||
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
|
||
\tablecheck{vtable}%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\tablecheck#1{%
|
||
\ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
|
||
that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
||
\def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\next\tablex
|
||
\fi
|
||
\next
|
||
}
|
||
\def\tablex#1{%
|
||
\def\itemindicate{#1}%
|
||
\parsearg\tabley
|
||
}
|
||
\def\tabley#1{%
|
||
{%
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
|
||
\expandafter
|
||
}\temp \endtablez
|
||
}
|
||
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
|
||
\aboveenvbreak
|
||
\ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
|
||
\ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
|
||
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
|
||
\itemmax=\tableindent
|
||
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
||
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent
|
||
\exdentamount=\tableindent
|
||
\parindent = 0pt
|
||
\parskip = \smallskipamount
|
||
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
||
\let\item = \internalBitem
|
||
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx
|
||
}
|
||
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
|
||
\let\Eftable\Etable
|
||
\let\Evtable\Etable
|
||
\let\Eitemize\Etable
|
||
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
|
||
|
||
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
||
|
||
\newcount \itemno
|
||
|
||
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
|
||
|
||
\def\doitemize#1{%
|
||
\aboveenvbreak
|
||
\itemmax=\itemindent
|
||
\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
||
\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
|
||
\exdentamount=\itemindent
|
||
\parindent=0pt
|
||
\parskip=\smallskipamount
|
||
\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
|
||
% something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
|
||
% right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
|
||
% world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
|
||
% the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
|
||
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
|
||
%
|
||
% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
|
||
\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\let\item=\itemizeitem
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\itemizeitem{%
|
||
\advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
|
||
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
|
||
{%
|
||
% If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
|
||
% \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
|
||
% done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
|
||
% parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
|
||
% other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
|
||
% usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
|
||
% space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
|
||
% that's the theory.
|
||
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
|
||
\noindent
|
||
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
|
||
%
|
||
\ifinner\else
|
||
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item.
|
||
\fi
|
||
% We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an
|
||
% @itemize looks awful there.
|
||
}%
|
||
\flushcr
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
||
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
||
|
||
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
||
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
||
% argument is the same as `1'.
|
||
%
|
||
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
||
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
||
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
||
\def\thearg{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
||
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
||
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
||
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
||
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
||
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
||
\ifx\rest\empty
|
||
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
||
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
||
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
||
% not equal to itself.
|
||
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
||
%
|
||
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
||
% continuing to look for a <number>.
|
||
%
|
||
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
||
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
||
\else
|
||
% It's a letter.
|
||
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
||
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
||
\else
|
||
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
||
\numericenumerate
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
||
% given in \thearg.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\numericenumerate{%
|
||
\itemno = \thearg
|
||
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
||
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
||
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
||
\startenumeration{%
|
||
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
||
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
||
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
||
alphabet}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\char\lccode\itemno
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
||
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
||
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
||
\startenumeration{%
|
||
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
||
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
||
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
||
alphabet}
|
||
\fi
|
||
\char\uccode\itemno
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
||
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
||
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\startenumeration#1{%
|
||
\advance\itemno by -1
|
||
\doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
||
% to @enumerate.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
||
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
||
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
||
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @multitable macros
|
||
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
||
%
|
||
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
||
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
||
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
||
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
||
|
||
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
||
|
||
% To make preamble:
|
||
%
|
||
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
||
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
||
% @item ...
|
||
%
|
||
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
||
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
||
% columns as desired.
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Or use a template:
|
||
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
||
% @item ...
|
||
% using the widest term desired in each column.
|
||
|
||
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
||
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
||
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
||
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
||
|
||
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
|
||
% if they are.
|
||
|
||
% Sample multitable:
|
||
|
||
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
||
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
||
% @item
|
||
% first col stuff
|
||
% @tab
|
||
% second col stuff
|
||
% @tab
|
||
% third col
|
||
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
||
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
||
%
|
||
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
||
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
||
% @end multitable
|
||
|
||
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
||
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
||
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
||
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
||
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
||
% to baseline.
|
||
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
||
%
|
||
\newskip\multitableparskip
|
||
\newskip\multitableparindent
|
||
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
||
\newskip\multitablelinespace
|
||
\multitableparskip=0pt
|
||
\multitableparindent=6pt
|
||
\multitablecolspace=12pt
|
||
\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
||
|
||
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
||
%
|
||
\let\endsetuptable\relax
|
||
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
||
\let\columnfractions\relax
|
||
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
||
\newif\ifsetpercent
|
||
|
||
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
|
||
% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
|
||
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
|
||
\setuptable
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newcount\colcount
|
||
\def\setuptable#1{%
|
||
\def\firstarg{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
||
\let\go = \relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
||
\global\setpercenttrue
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifsetpercent
|
||
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
||
\else
|
||
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
||
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
|
||
% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
||
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
||
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
||
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\go = \setuptable
|
||
\fi%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\go
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% multitable-only commands.
|
||
%
|
||
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments
|
||
% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
|
||
% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
|
||
% undo it ourselves.
|
||
\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
|
||
\def\headitem{%
|
||
\checkenv\multitable
|
||
\crcr
|
||
\gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
|
||
\global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
|
||
\the\everytab % for the first item
|
||
}%
|
||
%
|
||
% default for tables with no headings.
|
||
\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
|
||
%
|
||
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
|
||
% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
|
||
% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
|
||
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
||
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
|
||
|
||
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
||
%
|
||
\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
|
||
%
|
||
\envdef\multitable{%
|
||
\vskip\parskip
|
||
\startsavinginserts
|
||
%
|
||
% @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
|
||
% We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
|
||
% contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
|
||
% \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
|
||
\def\item{\crcr}%
|
||
%
|
||
\tolerance=9500
|
||
\hbadness=9500
|
||
\setmultitablespacing
|
||
\parskip=\multitableparskip
|
||
\parindent=\multitableparindent
|
||
\overfullrule=0pt
|
||
\global\colcount=0
|
||
%
|
||
\everycr = {%
|
||
\noalign{%
|
||
\global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem.
|
||
\global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
|
||
%
|
||
% Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
|
||
\checkinserts
|
||
%
|
||
% Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
|
||
\headitemcrhook
|
||
\global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
|
||
}%
|
||
}%
|
||
%
|
||
\parsearg\domultitable
|
||
}
|
||
\def\domultitable#1{%
|
||
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
||
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
||
%
|
||
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
||
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
||
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
||
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
||
\halign\bgroup &%
|
||
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
||
\multistrut
|
||
\vtop{%
|
||
% Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
|
||
\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
||
%
|
||
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
||
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
||
% the first one.
|
||
%
|
||
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
||
% to the width of each template entry.
|
||
%
|
||
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
||
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
||
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
||
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
||
%
|
||
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
||
\rightskip=0pt
|
||
\ifnum\colcount=1
|
||
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
||
\advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifsetpercent \else
|
||
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
||
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
||
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
||
\fi
|
||
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
||
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
||
\fi
|
||
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
||
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
||
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
||
% For example:
|
||
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
||
% @item @code{#}
|
||
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
||
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
|
||
% marking characters.
|
||
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
|
||
}\cr
|
||
}
|
||
\def\Emultitable{%
|
||
\crcr
|
||
\egroup % end the \halign
|
||
\global\setpercentfalse
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
|
||
\def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
|
||
%
|
||
% Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
|
||
% \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
|
||
% this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
|
||
% See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
|
||
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
||
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
||
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
||
\fi
|
||
% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
||
% table. If not, do nothing.
|
||
% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
||
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
||
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
||
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
||
% than skip between lines in the table.
|
||
\fi%
|
||
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
||
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
||
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
||
% than skip between lines in the table.
|
||
\fi}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{conditionals,}
|
||
|
||
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
|
||
% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
|
||
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
|
||
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
|
||
% attempt to close an environment group.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\makecond#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
|
||
}
|
||
\makecond{iftex}
|
||
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
|
||
\makecond{ifnothtml}
|
||
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
|
||
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
|
||
\makecond{ifnotxml}
|
||
|
||
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
||
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
|
||
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
|
||
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
||
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
|
||
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
||
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
||
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
||
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
|
||
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
|
||
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
||
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
||
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
|
||
|
||
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
|
||
%
|
||
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
|
||
\newcount\doignorecount
|
||
|
||
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
||
% Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
|
||
\obeylines
|
||
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
||
\catcode`\{ = \other
|
||
\catcode`\} = \other
|
||
%
|
||
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
||
\spaceisspace
|
||
%
|
||
% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
|
||
\doignorecount = 0
|
||
%
|
||
% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
|
||
\dodoignore{#1}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
|
||
\obeylines %
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\dodoignore#1{%
|
||
% #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
|
||
%
|
||
% Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
|
||
\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
|
||
\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
|
||
%
|
||
% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
|
||
% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
|
||
% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
|
||
\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
|
||
%
|
||
% And now expand that command.
|
||
\doignoretext ^^M%
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
|
||
\let\next\doignoretextzzz
|
||
\else % Found a nested condition, ...
|
||
\advance\doignorecount by 1
|
||
\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
|
||
% If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
|
||
\fi
|
||
\next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
|
||
%
|
||
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
|
||
\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
|
||
\let\next\enddoignore
|
||
\else % Still inside a nested condition.
|
||
\advance\doignorecount by -1
|
||
\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
|
||
\fi
|
||
\next
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Finish off ignored text.
|
||
{ \obeylines%
|
||
% Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
|
||
% environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
|
||
% would result in a blank line in the output.
|
||
\gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
||
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
||
%
|
||
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
||
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
||
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
||
% didn't need it.
|
||
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
||
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
||
{%
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\def\temp{#2}%
|
||
\edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\empty
|
||
\next{}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\setzzz#2\endsetzzz
|
||
\fi
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
||
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
|
||
|
||
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\clear{%
|
||
{%
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
||
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
|
||
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
|
||
\let\value = \expandablevalue
|
||
% We don't want these characters active, ...
|
||
\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
|
||
% ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
|
||
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
|
||
% So \let them to their normal equivalents.
|
||
\let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
||
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
||
\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the
|
||
% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when
|
||
% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does.
|
||
% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it
|
||
% will be set by the time it is read back in.
|
||
%
|
||
% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here.
|
||
\def\dummyvalue#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
||
\string\value{#1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value
|
||
% if possible, otherwise sort late.
|
||
\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
||
ZZZZZZZ%
|
||
\else
|
||
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
||
% with @set.
|
||
%
|
||
% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
|
||
% \makecond and then redefine.
|
||
%
|
||
\makecond{ifset}
|
||
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
|
||
\def\doifset#1#2{%
|
||
{%
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\let\next=\empty
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
|
||
#1% If not set, redefine \next.
|
||
\fi
|
||
\expandafter
|
||
}\next
|
||
}
|
||
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
|
||
|
||
% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
||
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
||
%
|
||
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
|
||
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
|
||
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
|
||
%
|
||
\makecond{ifclear}
|
||
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
|
||
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
|
||
|
||
% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
|
||
% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
|
||
% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
|
||
% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
|
||
%
|
||
\makecond{ifcommanddefined}
|
||
\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\let\next=\empty
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
|
||
#1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
|
||
\fi
|
||
\expandafter
|
||
}\next
|
||
}
|
||
\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
|
||
|
||
% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
|
||
\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
|
||
\def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
|
||
\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
|
||
\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
|
||
|
||
% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
|
||
% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
|
||
\set txicommandconditionals
|
||
|
||
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
||
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
||
\let\dircategory=\comment
|
||
|
||
% @defininfoenclose.
|
||
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{indexing,}
|
||
% Index generation facilities
|
||
|
||
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
||
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
|
||
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
|
||
|
||
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX.
|
||
% It automatically defines \IXindex such that
|
||
% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX.
|
||
% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
||
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX.
|
||
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
||
% for the sake of vms.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\newindex#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
||
\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
||
|
||
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
||
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% The default indices:
|
||
\newindex{cp}% concepts,
|
||
\newcodeindex{fn}% functions,
|
||
\newcodeindex{vr}% variables,
|
||
\newcodeindex{tp}% types,
|
||
\newcodeindex{ky}% keys
|
||
\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
||
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
||
%
|
||
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
||
% inside @code.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
|
||
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
|
||
|
||
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
|
||
% #3 the target index (bar).
|
||
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
|
||
\requireopenindexfile{#3}%
|
||
% redefine \fooindfile:
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
|
||
% redefine \fooindex:
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros.
|
||
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
||
% and it is the two-letter name of the index.
|
||
|
||
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx}
|
||
\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
||
|
||
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
||
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx}
|
||
\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\docind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo
|
||
% commands.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\atdummies{%
|
||
\definedummyletter\@%
|
||
\definedummyletter\ %
|
||
\definedummyletter\{%
|
||
\definedummyletter\}%
|
||
\definedummyletter\&%
|
||
%
|
||
% Do the redefinitions.
|
||
\definedummies
|
||
\otherbackslash
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
|
||
% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
|
||
% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
|
||
% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
|
||
% from whatever follows.
|
||
%
|
||
% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
|
||
% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
|
||
% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
|
||
%
|
||
% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
|
||
% space.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}%
|
||
\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}%
|
||
\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
|
||
|
||
% Called from \atdummies to prevent the expansion of commands.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\definedummies{%
|
||
%
|
||
\let\commondummyword\definedummyword
|
||
\let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter
|
||
\let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent
|
||
\commondummiesnofonts
|
||
%
|
||
\definedummyletter\_%
|
||
\definedummyletter\-%
|
||
%
|
||
% Non-English letters.
|
||
\definedummyword\AA
|
||
\definedummyword\AE
|
||
\definedummyword\DH
|
||
\definedummyword\L
|
||
\definedummyword\O
|
||
\definedummyword\OE
|
||
\definedummyword\TH
|
||
\definedummyword\aa
|
||
\definedummyword\ae
|
||
\definedummyword\dh
|
||
\definedummyword\exclamdown
|
||
\definedummyword\l
|
||
\definedummyword\o
|
||
\definedummyword\oe
|
||
\definedummyword\ordf
|
||
\definedummyword\ordm
|
||
\definedummyword\questiondown
|
||
\definedummyword\ss
|
||
\definedummyword\th
|
||
%
|
||
% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
|
||
\definedummyword\bf
|
||
\definedummyword\gtr
|
||
\definedummyword\hat
|
||
\definedummyword\less
|
||
\definedummyword\sf
|
||
\definedummyword\sl
|
||
\definedummyword\tclose
|
||
\definedummyword\tt
|
||
%
|
||
\definedummyword\LaTeX
|
||
\definedummyword\TeX
|
||
%
|
||
% Assorted special characters.
|
||
\definedummyword\ampchar
|
||
\definedummyword\atchar
|
||
\definedummyword\arrow
|
||
\definedummyword\backslashchar
|
||
\definedummyword\bullet
|
||
\definedummyword\comma
|
||
\definedummyword\copyright
|
||
\definedummyword\registeredsymbol
|
||
\definedummyword\dots
|
||
\definedummyword\enddots
|
||
\definedummyword\entrybreak
|
||
\definedummyword\equiv
|
||
\definedummyword\error
|
||
\definedummyword\euro
|
||
\definedummyword\expansion
|
||
\definedummyword\geq
|
||
\definedummyword\guillemetleft
|
||
\definedummyword\guillemetright
|
||
\definedummyword\guilsinglleft
|
||
\definedummyword\guilsinglright
|
||
\definedummyword\lbracechar
|
||
\definedummyword\leq
|
||
\definedummyword\mathopsup
|
||
\definedummyword\minus
|
||
\definedummyword\ogonek
|
||
\definedummyword\pounds
|
||
\definedummyword\point
|
||
\definedummyword\print
|
||
\definedummyword\quotedblbase
|
||
\definedummyword\quotedblleft
|
||
\definedummyword\quotedblright
|
||
\definedummyword\quoteleft
|
||
\definedummyword\quoteright
|
||
\definedummyword\quotesinglbase
|
||
\definedummyword\rbracechar
|
||
\definedummyword\result
|
||
\definedummyword\sub
|
||
\definedummyword\sup
|
||
\definedummyword\textdegree
|
||
%
|
||
\definedummyword\subentry
|
||
%
|
||
% We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
|
||
\macrolist
|
||
\let\value\dummyvalue
|
||
%
|
||
\normalturnoffactive
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts.
|
||
% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before
|
||
% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
|
||
% Control letters and accents.
|
||
\commondummyletter\!%
|
||
\commondummyaccent\"%
|
||
\commondummyaccent\'%
|
||
\commondummyletter\*%
|
||
\commondummyaccent\,%
|
||
\commondummyletter\.%
|
||
\commondummyletter\/%
|
||
\commondummyletter\:%
|
||
\commondummyaccent\=%
|
||
\commondummyletter\?%
|
||
\commondummyaccent\^%
|
||
\commondummyaccent\`%
|
||
\commondummyaccent\~%
|
||
\commondummyword\u
|
||
\commondummyword\v
|
||
\commondummyword\H
|
||
\commondummyword\dotaccent
|
||
\commondummyword\ogonek
|
||
\commondummyword\ringaccent
|
||
\commondummyword\tieaccent
|
||
\commondummyword\ubaraccent
|
||
\commondummyword\udotaccent
|
||
\commondummyword\dotless
|
||
%
|
||
% Texinfo font commands.
|
||
\commondummyword\b
|
||
\commondummyword\i
|
||
\commondummyword\r
|
||
\commondummyword\sansserif
|
||
\commondummyword\sc
|
||
\commondummyword\slanted
|
||
\commondummyword\t
|
||
%
|
||
% Commands that take arguments.
|
||
\commondummyword\abbr
|
||
\commondummyword\acronym
|
||
\commondummyword\anchor
|
||
\commondummyword\cite
|
||
\commondummyword\code
|
||
\commondummyword\command
|
||
\commondummyword\dfn
|
||
\commondummyword\dmn
|
||
\commondummyword\email
|
||
\commondummyword\emph
|
||
\commondummyword\env
|
||
\commondummyword\file
|
||
\commondummyword\image
|
||
\commondummyword\indicateurl
|
||
\commondummyword\inforef
|
||
\commondummyword\kbd
|
||
\commondummyword\key
|
||
\commondummyword\math
|
||
\commondummyword\option
|
||
\commondummyword\pxref
|
||
\commondummyword\ref
|
||
\commondummyword\samp
|
||
\commondummyword\strong
|
||
\commondummyword\tie
|
||
\commondummyword\U
|
||
\commondummyword\uref
|
||
\commondummyword\url
|
||
\commondummyword\var
|
||
\commondummyword\verb
|
||
\commondummyword\w
|
||
\commondummyword\xref
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\let\indexlbrace\relax
|
||
\let\indexrbrace\relax
|
||
\let\indexatchar\relax
|
||
\let\indexbackslash\relax
|
||
|
||
{\catcode`\@=0
|
||
\catcode`\\=13
|
||
@gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`\<=13
|
||
\catcode`\-=13
|
||
\catcode`\`=13
|
||
\gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
||
% @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term.
|
||
% (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.)
|
||
\let`=\empty
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
||
\backslashdisappear
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
||
\def-{}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
||
\def<{}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
||
\def\@{}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{%
|
||
\let-\normaldash
|
||
\let<\normalless
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
|
||
% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
|
||
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
|
||
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\indexnofonts{%
|
||
% Accent commands should become @asis.
|
||
\def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
|
||
% We can just ignore other control letters.
|
||
\def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
|
||
% All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
|
||
\let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent
|
||
\commondummiesnofonts
|
||
%
|
||
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
||
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
|
||
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
|
||
%\let\tt=\asis
|
||
%
|
||
\def\ { }%
|
||
\def\@{@}%
|
||
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
|
||
\def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
|
||
%
|
||
\uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}%
|
||
\uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}%
|
||
\let\lbracechar\{%
|
||
\let\rbracechar\}%
|
||
%
|
||
%
|
||
\let\do\indexnofontsdef
|
||
%
|
||
% Non-English letters.
|
||
\do\AA{AA}%
|
||
\do\AE{AE}%
|
||
\do\DH{DZZ}%
|
||
\do\L{L}%
|
||
\do\OE{OE}%
|
||
\do\O{O}%
|
||
\do\TH{TH}%
|
||
\do\aa{aa}%
|
||
\do\ae{ae}%
|
||
\do\dh{dzz}%
|
||
\do\exclamdown{!}%
|
||
\do\l{l}%
|
||
\do\oe{oe}%
|
||
\do\ordf{a}%
|
||
\do\ordm{o}%
|
||
\do\o{o}%
|
||
\do\questiondown{?}%
|
||
\do\ss{ss}%
|
||
\do\th{th}%
|
||
%
|
||
\do\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
|
||
\do\TeX{TeX}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Assorted special characters.
|
||
\do\atchar{@}%
|
||
\do\arrow{->}%
|
||
\do\bullet{bullet}%
|
||
\do\comma{,}%
|
||
\do\copyright{copyright}%
|
||
\do\dots{...}%
|
||
\do\enddots{...}%
|
||
\do\equiv{==}%
|
||
\do\error{error}%
|
||
\do\euro{euro}%
|
||
\do\expansion{==>}%
|
||
\do\geq{>=}%
|
||
\do\guillemetleft{<<}%
|
||
\do\guillemetright{>>}%
|
||
\do\guilsinglleft{<}%
|
||
\do\guilsinglright{>}%
|
||
\do\leq{<=}%
|
||
\do\lbracechar{\{}%
|
||
\do\minus{-}%
|
||
\do\point{.}%
|
||
\do\pounds{pounds}%
|
||
\do\print{-|}%
|
||
\do\quotedblbase{"}%
|
||
\do\quotedblleft{"}%
|
||
\do\quotedblright{"}%
|
||
\do\quoteleft{`}%
|
||
\do\quoteright{'}%
|
||
\do\quotesinglbase{,}%
|
||
\do\rbracechar{\}}%
|
||
\do\registeredsymbol{R}%
|
||
\do\result{=>}%
|
||
\do\textdegree{o}%
|
||
%
|
||
% We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
|
||
% Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
|
||
% makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
|
||
% writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
|
||
% that starts with \.
|
||
%
|
||
% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
|
||
% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
|
||
% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
|
||
%
|
||
\macrolist
|
||
\let\value\indexnofontsvalue
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Give the control sequence a definition that removes the {} that follows
|
||
% its use, e.g. @AA{} -> AA
|
||
\def\indexnofontsdef#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}}%
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
|
||
\def\doind#1#2{%
|
||
\iflinks
|
||
{%
|
||
%
|
||
\requireopenindexfile{#1}%
|
||
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
||
%
|
||
\def\indextext{#2}%
|
||
\safewhatsit\doindwrite
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Same as \doind, but for code indices
|
||
\def\docind#1#2{%
|
||
\iflinks
|
||
{%
|
||
%
|
||
\requireopenindexfile{#1}%
|
||
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
||
%
|
||
\def\indextext{#2}%
|
||
\safewhatsit\docindwrite
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it.
|
||
\def\requireopenindexfile#1{%
|
||
\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0
|
||
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
||
\edef\suffix{#1}%
|
||
% A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output
|
||
% of -recorder, so use .f1s instead.
|
||
\ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi
|
||
% Open the file
|
||
\immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix
|
||
% Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current
|
||
% box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for
|
||
% preceding skips.
|
||
\typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}%
|
||
\fi}
|
||
\def\indexisfl{fl}
|
||
|
||
% Definition for writing index entry sort key.
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`\-=13
|
||
\gdef\indexwritesortas{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\indexnonalnumreappear
|
||
\indexwritesortasxxx}
|
||
\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{%
|
||
\xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\indexwriteseealso#1{
|
||
\gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\indexwriteseeentry#1{
|
||
\gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% The default definitions
|
||
\def\sortas#1{}%
|
||
\def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
|
||
\def\putwordSeeAlso{See also}
|
||
\def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}":
|
||
% * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}"
|
||
% * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ"
|
||
% * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext
|
||
%
|
||
\def\splitindexentry#1{%
|
||
\gdef\fullindexsortkey{}%
|
||
\xdef\bracedtext{}%
|
||
\def\sep{}%
|
||
\def\seealso##1{}%
|
||
\def\seeentry##1{}%
|
||
\expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% append the results from the next segment
|
||
\def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{%
|
||
\def\segment{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\segment\isfinish
|
||
\else
|
||
%
|
||
% Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and
|
||
% trim spaces.
|
||
\edef\trimmed{\segment}%
|
||
\edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
|
||
\ifincodeindex
|
||
\edef\trimmed{\noexpand\code{\trimmed}}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all
|
||
% font commands turned off.
|
||
\bgroup
|
||
\let\sortas\indexwritesortas
|
||
\let\seealso\indexwriteseealso
|
||
\let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
% The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex.
|
||
\def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}%
|
||
\def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}%
|
||
\let\{=\lbracechar
|
||
\let\}=\rbracechar
|
||
\def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}%
|
||
\def\atchar##1{\@}%
|
||
\def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}%
|
||
\uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}%
|
||
%
|
||
\let\indexsortkey\empty
|
||
\global\let\pagenumbertext\empty
|
||
% Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes
|
||
% any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment.
|
||
\setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}%
|
||
\ifx\indexsortkey\empty{%
|
||
\indexnonalnumdisappear
|
||
\xdef\trimmed{\segment}%
|
||
\xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
|
||
\xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}%
|
||
\ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi
|
||
}\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Append to \fullindexsortkey.
|
||
\edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{%
|
||
\fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}%
|
||
\tmp
|
||
\egroup
|
||
\def\sep{\subentry}%
|
||
%
|
||
\expandafter\doindexsegment
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\isfinish{\finish}%
|
||
\newbox\dummybox % used above
|
||
|
||
\let\subentry\relax
|
||
|
||
% Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex.
|
||
% This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux
|
||
% files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses
|
||
% the current value of \escapechar.
|
||
\def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\}
|
||
|
||
% Use \ in index files by default. texi2dvi didn't support @ as the escape
|
||
% character (as it checked for "\entry" in the files, and not "@entry"). When
|
||
% the new version of texi2dvi has had a chance to become more prevalent, then
|
||
% the escape character can change back to @ again. This should be an easy
|
||
% change to make now because both @ and \ are only used as escape characters in
|
||
% index files, never standing for themselves.
|
||
%
|
||
\set txiindexescapeisbackslash
|
||
|
||
% Write the entry in \indextext to the index file.
|
||
%
|
||
|
||
\newif\ifincodeindex
|
||
\def\doindwrite{\incodeindexfalse\doindwritex}
|
||
\def\docindwrite{\incodeindextrue\doindwritex}
|
||
|
||
\def\doindwritex{%
|
||
\maybemarginindex
|
||
%
|
||
\atdummies
|
||
%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax\else
|
||
\escapeisbackslash
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% For texindex which always views { and } as separators.
|
||
\def\{{\lbracechar{}}%
|
||
\def\}{\rbracechar{}}%
|
||
\uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index
|
||
% sort key.
|
||
\splitindexentry\indextext
|
||
%
|
||
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
|
||
% the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
||
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
|
||
% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
|
||
% sorted result.
|
||
%
|
||
\edef\temp{%
|
||
\write\writeto{%
|
||
\string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}%
|
||
{\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}%
|
||
\bracedtext}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\temp
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented).
|
||
\def\maybemarginindex{%
|
||
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
||
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
|
||
%
|
||
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
||
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
||
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
||
% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
|
||
% sequences like this:
|
||
% @end defun
|
||
% @tindex whatever
|
||
% @defun ...
|
||
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
||
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
||
% the previous defun.
|
||
%
|
||
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
||
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
||
%
|
||
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
||
%
|
||
% But wait, there is a catch there:
|
||
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
|
||
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
|
||
% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
|
||
% representation of the skip.
|
||
%
|
||
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
|
||
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
|
||
%
|
||
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
|
||
%
|
||
\newskip\whatsitskip
|
||
\newcount\whatsitpenalty
|
||
%
|
||
% ..., ready, GO:
|
||
%
|
||
\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
|
||
#1%
|
||
\else
|
||
% \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
|
||
\whatsitskip = \lastskip
|
||
\edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
|
||
\whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
|
||
%
|
||
% If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
|
||
% skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
|
||
% -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
|
||
% non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
|
||
% breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
|
||
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
||
\else
|
||
\vskip-\whatsitskip
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
#1%
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
||
% If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
|
||
% perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
|
||
% to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
|
||
% signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
|
||
% following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
|
||
% @deffn deffn-whatever
|
||
% @vindex index-whatever
|
||
% Description.
|
||
% would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
|
||
% and the "Description." paragraph.
|
||
\ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
|
||
\else
|
||
% On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
|
||
% this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
|
||
% (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
|
||
\nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi}
|
||
|
||
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
||
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
||
% or
|
||
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
||
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
||
% containing these kinds of lines:
|
||
% \initial {c}
|
||
% before the first topic whose initial is c
|
||
% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
||
% for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
||
% \primary {topic}
|
||
% \entry {topic}{}
|
||
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
||
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
||
% for each subtopic.
|
||
% \secondary {subtopic}{}
|
||
% for a subtopic with sub-subtopics
|
||
% \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist}
|
||
% for each sub-subtopic.
|
||
|
||
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
||
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
||
|
||
\def\findex {\fnindex}
|
||
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
||
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
||
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
||
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
||
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
||
|
||
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
||
|
||
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
||
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
|
||
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
||
%
|
||
\smallfonts \rm
|
||
\tolerance = 9500
|
||
\plainfrenchspacing
|
||
\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
|
||
%
|
||
% See comment in \requireopenindexfile.
|
||
\def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
||
\openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s
|
||
\ifeof 1
|
||
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
||
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
||
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
||
% there is some text.
|
||
\putwordIndexNonexistent
|
||
\typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}%
|
||
\else
|
||
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
||
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
||
% it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
||
\read 1 to \thisline
|
||
\ifeof 1
|
||
\putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
||
\else
|
||
\expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
% If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index
|
||
% file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have
|
||
% old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would
|
||
% at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error.
|
||
\def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax
|
||
\uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiskipindexfileswithbackslash\endcsname\relax
|
||
\errmessage{%
|
||
ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped.
|
||
To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi'
|
||
or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>.
|
||
If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo
|
||
distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0).
|
||
You may be able to typeset the index if you run
|
||
'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself.
|
||
You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by
|
||
running a command like
|
||
'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do
|
||
this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format.
|
||
If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again
|
||
might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')%
|
||
}%
|
||
\else
|
||
(Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format)
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\begindoublecolumns
|
||
\input \jobname.\indexname s
|
||
\enddoublecolumns
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\begindoublecolumns
|
||
\catcode`\\=0\relax
|
||
%
|
||
% Make @ an escape character to give macros a chance to work. This
|
||
% should work because we (hopefully) don't otherwise use @ in index files.
|
||
%\catcode`\@=12\relax
|
||
\catcode`\@=0\relax
|
||
\input \jobname.\indexname s
|
||
\enddoublecolumns
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
||
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
||
|
||
{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13
|
||
\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13
|
||
\catcode`\$=3
|
||
\gdef\initialglyphs{%
|
||
% special control sequences used in the index sort key
|
||
\let\indexlbrace\{%
|
||
\let\indexrbrace\}%
|
||
\let\indexatchar\@%
|
||
\def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the
|
||
% math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere
|
||
% for these characters.
|
||
\uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}}
|
||
%
|
||
% In case @\ is used for backslash
|
||
\uppercase{\let\\=~}
|
||
% Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash
|
||
\catcode`\/=13
|
||
\def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}%
|
||
\def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--'
|
||
\def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}%
|
||
\def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}%
|
||
\def\_{%
|
||
\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }%
|
||
\def|{$\vert$}%
|
||
\def<{$\less$}%
|
||
\def>{$\gtr$}%
|
||
\def+{$\normalplus$}%
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
\def\initial{%
|
||
\bgroup
|
||
\initialglyphs
|
||
\initialx
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\initialx#1{%
|
||
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
||
\removelastskip
|
||
%
|
||
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
||
% The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the
|
||
% bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing.
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
\vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
|
||
\penalty -300
|
||
\vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
|
||
%
|
||
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
||
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
||
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
||
% we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
||
%
|
||
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
||
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip
|
||
\leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}%
|
||
% \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of
|
||
% \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that
|
||
% \leftline creates.
|
||
% Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
||
\egroup % \initialglyphs
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newdimen\entryrightmargin
|
||
\entryrightmargin=0pt
|
||
|
||
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
|
||
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
|
||
% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\entry{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
%
|
||
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
||
% affect previous text.
|
||
\par
|
||
%
|
||
% No extra space above this paragraph.
|
||
\parskip = 0in
|
||
%
|
||
% When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
|
||
% from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
|
||
% titles, for instance.
|
||
\def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
|
||
\def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command
|
||
%
|
||
% Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
|
||
\afterassignment\doentry
|
||
\let\temp =
|
||
}
|
||
\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
|
||
\def\doentry{%
|
||
% Save the text of the entry
|
||
\global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
|
||
\bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
|
||
\noindent
|
||
\aftergroup\finishentry
|
||
% And now comes the text of the entry.
|
||
% Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems
|
||
% with catcodes occurring.
|
||
}
|
||
{\catcode`\@=11
|
||
\gdef\finishentry#1{%
|
||
\egroup % end box A
|
||
\dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry
|
||
\global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
|
||
\unhbox\boxA
|
||
% #1 is the page number.
|
||
%
|
||
% Get the width of the page numbers, and only use
|
||
% leaders if they are present.
|
||
\global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}%
|
||
\ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
|
||
\null\nobreak\hfill\ %
|
||
\else
|
||
%
|
||
\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
||
%
|
||
\ifpdforxetex
|
||
\pdfgettoks#1.%
|
||
\hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA
|
||
\else
|
||
\hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\egroup % end \boxA
|
||
\ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
|
||
\noindent\unhbox\boxA\par
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
\else\bgroup
|
||
% We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the
|
||
% page numbers to be aligned to the right.
|
||
%
|
||
\parindent = 0pt
|
||
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
||
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill
|
||
\rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil
|
||
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill
|
||
% Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own
|
||
% if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right.
|
||
\parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill
|
||
%
|
||
\advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin
|
||
% Determine how far we can stretch into the margin.
|
||
% This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to
|
||
% fit on one line in @letterpaper format.
|
||
\ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em
|
||
\dimen@i=2.1em
|
||
\else
|
||
\dimen@i=0em
|
||
\fi
|
||
\advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i
|
||
%
|
||
\dimen@ii = \hsize
|
||
\advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip
|
||
\advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin
|
||
\advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i
|
||
\ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line
|
||
\ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text
|
||
% Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of
|
||
% the first line.
|
||
\dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@
|
||
\dimen@ii = \hsize
|
||
\ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii
|
||
% If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than
|
||
% two lines), use all the space in the first line.
|
||
\dimen@ = \dimen@ii
|
||
\fi
|
||
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right
|
||
\advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip
|
||
\parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii
|
||
% Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only,
|
||
% instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX
|
||
% doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing.
|
||
%
|
||
% Indent all lines but the first one.
|
||
\advance\leftskip by 1em
|
||
\advance\parindent by -1em
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
\indent % start paragraph
|
||
\unhbox\boxA
|
||
%
|
||
% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
||
\finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
||
%
|
||
% Word spacing - no stretch
|
||
\spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font
|
||
%
|
||
\linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks.
|
||
\hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation.
|
||
%
|
||
\par % format the paragraph
|
||
\egroup % The \vbox
|
||
\fi
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
\newskip\thinshrinkable
|
||
\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em
|
||
|
||
% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
|
||
% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push
|
||
% the page number to the right.
|
||
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
||
\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
||
|
||
\def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}}
|
||
\def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}}
|
||
|
||
\def\indententry#1#2#3{%
|
||
\bgroup
|
||
\leftskip=#1
|
||
\entry{#2}{#3}%
|
||
\egroup
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
||
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
||
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
||
\catcode`\@=11 % private names
|
||
|
||
\newbox\partialpage
|
||
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
||
|
||
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
||
% If not much space left on page, start a new page.
|
||
\ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Grab any single-column material above us.
|
||
\output = {%
|
||
\savetopmark
|
||
%
|
||
\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
||
% Unvbox the main output page.
|
||
\unvbox\PAGE
|
||
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
||
}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
|
||
%
|
||
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
||
\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
||
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
||
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
||
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
||
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
||
%
|
||
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
||
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
||
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
||
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
||
% as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
||
%
|
||
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
||
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
||
% been clobbered.
|
||
%
|
||
\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
||
\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
||
\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
||
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
||
%
|
||
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
||
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
||
% previous page.
|
||
\advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
|
||
\vsize = 2\vsize
|
||
%
|
||
% For the benefit of balancing columns
|
||
\advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
||
% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\doublecolumnout{%
|
||
%
|
||
\savetopmark
|
||
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
||
\dimen@ = \vsize
|
||
\divide\dimen@ by 2
|
||
%
|
||
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
||
\setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@
|
||
\global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage
|
||
\onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called
|
||
\unvbox\PAGE
|
||
\penalty\outputpenalty
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
||
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
||
\def\pagesofar{%
|
||
\unvbox\partialpage
|
||
%
|
||
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
||
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
||
\hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Finished with double columns.
|
||
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
||
% The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
|
||
% _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
|
||
% following situation:
|
||
%
|
||
% The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
|
||
% Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
|
||
% break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
|
||
% section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
|
||
% fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
|
||
% penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
|
||
% below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
|
||
% routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
|
||
% double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
|
||
% is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
|
||
% the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
|
||
% the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
|
||
% break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
|
||
% page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
|
||
% goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
|
||
% section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
|
||
% \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
|
||
% and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see
|
||
% \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
|
||
%
|
||
% Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
|
||
% page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
|
||
\penalty0
|
||
%
|
||
\output = {%
|
||
% Split the last of the double-column material.
|
||
\savetopmark
|
||
\balancecolumns
|
||
}%
|
||
\eject % call the \output just set
|
||
\ifdim\pagetotal=0pt
|
||
% Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
||
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
||
% definition right away.
|
||
\global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
|
||
%
|
||
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
||
% Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic
|
||
% page break.
|
||
\box\balancedcolumns
|
||
%
|
||
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
||
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
||
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize.
|
||
\global\vsize = \txipageheight %
|
||
\pagegoal = \txipageheight %
|
||
\else
|
||
% We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout
|
||
% is called in \balancecolumns. Try again.
|
||
\expandafter\enddoublecolumns
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\newbox\balancedcolumns
|
||
\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout
|
||
% does the others.
|
||
\def\balancecolumns{%
|
||
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
||
\dimen@ = \ht0
|
||
\ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip
|
||
% Don't split a short final column in two.
|
||
\setbox2=\vbox{}%
|
||
\global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
|
||
\else
|
||
% double the leading vertical space
|
||
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
||
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
||
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
||
\dimen@ii = \dimen@
|
||
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
||
% Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column.
|
||
{%
|
||
\vbadness = 10000
|
||
\loop
|
||
\global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
||
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
||
\ifdim\ht1<\ht3
|
||
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
||
\repeat
|
||
}%
|
||
% Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3.
|
||
%
|
||
% Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself.
|
||
% (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so
|
||
% the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize).
|
||
\ifdim2\ht1>\vsize
|
||
% It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material.
|
||
% Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page.
|
||
\setbox\PAGE=\box0
|
||
\doublecolumnout
|
||
\else
|
||
% Compare the heights of the two columns.
|
||
\ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3
|
||
% Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms
|
||
% flush with each other.
|
||
\setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}%
|
||
\setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}%
|
||
\else
|
||
% Make column bottoms flush with each other.
|
||
\setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}%
|
||
\setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
}
|
||
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{sectioning,}
|
||
% Chapters, sections, etc.
|
||
|
||
% Let's start with @part.
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
|
||
\def\partzzz#1{%
|
||
\chapoddpage
|
||
\null
|
||
\vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text
|
||
\let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
|
||
\writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
|
||
\headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
|
||
% This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter
|
||
% and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents.
|
||
\let\pchapsepmacro\relax
|
||
\chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
|
||
\chapoddpage
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
|
||
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
|
||
% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
|
||
% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
|
||
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
|
||
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
|
||
\newcount\chapno
|
||
\newcount\secno \secno=0
|
||
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
||
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
||
|
||
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
||
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
||
%
|
||
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
||
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
|
||
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
|
||
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\appendixletter{%
|
||
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
|
||
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
|
||
% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
|
||
% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
|
||
% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
|
||
% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
|
||
\else\char\the\appendixno
|
||
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
||
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
||
|
||
% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
|
||
% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
|
||
% these. @section does likewise.
|
||
\def\thischapter{}
|
||
\def\thischapternum{}
|
||
\def\thischaptername{}
|
||
\def\thissection{}
|
||
\def\thissectionnum{}
|
||
\def\thissectionname{}
|
||
|
||
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
||
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
|
||
|
||
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
||
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
||
|
||
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
||
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
||
|
||
% we only have subsub.
|
||
\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
|
||
%
|
||
% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
|
||
% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
|
||
\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
|
||
%
|
||
% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
|
||
% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
|
||
\def\chapheadtype{N}
|
||
|
||
% Choose a heading macro
|
||
% #1 is heading type
|
||
% #2 is heading level
|
||
% #3 is text for heading
|
||
\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
|
||
% Compute the abs. sec. level:
|
||
\absseclevel=#2
|
||
\advance\absseclevel by \secbase
|
||
% Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
|
||
\ifnum \absseclevel < 0
|
||
\absseclevel = 0
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifnum \absseclevel > 3
|
||
\absseclevel = 3
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
% The heading type:
|
||
\def\headtype{#1}%
|
||
\if \headtype U%
|
||
\ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
|
||
\chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
% Check for appendix sections:
|
||
\ifnum \absseclevel = 0
|
||
\edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
|
||
\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
% Check for numbered within unnumbered:
|
||
\ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
|
||
\def\headtype{U}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\chardef\unnlevel = 3
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
% Now print the heading:
|
||
\if \headtype U%
|
||
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
||
\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\if \headtype A%
|
||
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
||
\appendixzzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
||
\chapterzzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \seczzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
||
\or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% an interface:
|
||
\def\numhead{\genhead N}
|
||
\def\apphead{\genhead A}
|
||
\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
|
||
|
||
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
|
||
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
|
||
%
|
||
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
|
||
% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
|
||
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
||
%
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
||
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
|
||
% section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
|
||
% as an @include file.
|
||
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
||
\global\advance\chapno by 1
|
||
%
|
||
% Used for \float.
|
||
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
|
||
\resetallfloatnos
|
||
%
|
||
% \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
|
||
\toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
|
||
\message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Write the actual heading.
|
||
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
|
||
%
|
||
% So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
|
||
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
||
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
||
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
|
||
%
|
||
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
|
||
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
||
\global\advance\appendixno by 1
|
||
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
|
||
\resetallfloatnos
|
||
%
|
||
% \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
|
||
\toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
|
||
\message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
|
||
%
|
||
\chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
|
||
%
|
||
\global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
||
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
||
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
|
||
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
|
||
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
||
\global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
|
||
%
|
||
% Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
|
||
\global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
||
\resetallfloatnos
|
||
%
|
||
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
||
% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
||
% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
||
% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
||
% to be executed, not expanded).
|
||
%
|
||
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
||
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
||
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
||
% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
|
||
% the toc entries.)
|
||
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
||
\message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
||
%
|
||
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
|
||
%
|
||
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
||
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
||
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
|
||
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
|
||
\unnmhead0{#1}%
|
||
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @top is like @unnumbered.
|
||
\let\top\unnumbered
|
||
|
||
% Sections.
|
||
%
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
||
\def\seczzz#1{%
|
||
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
|
||
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
|
||
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
|
||
}
|
||
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
|
||
|
||
% normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
|
||
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
|
||
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Subsections.
|
||
%
|
||
% normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
|
||
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
||
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
|
||
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
|
||
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
|
||
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
|
||
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
||
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
|
||
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Subsubsections.
|
||
%
|
||
% normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
|
||
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
||
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
|
||
{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
|
||
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
||
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
|
||
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
|
||
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
|
||
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
||
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
||
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
|
||
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
||
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
||
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
||
\let\section = \numberedsec
|
||
\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
||
\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
||
|
||
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
||
|
||
\def\majorheading{%
|
||
{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
||
\parsearg\chapheadingzzz
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
||
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
|
||
\vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
|
||
\nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
|
||
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
||
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
||
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
||
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
||
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
||
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
||
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
||
|
||
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
||
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
||
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
||
|
||
% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
||
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
||
|
||
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
||
\newskip\chapheadingskip
|
||
|
||
% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
|
||
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
||
|
||
% Start a new page
|
||
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
||
|
||
% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter
|
||
% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
|
||
% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
|
||
% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
|
||
\def\chapoddpage{%
|
||
\chappager
|
||
\ifodd\pageno \else
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\headingsoff
|
||
\null
|
||
\chappager
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
||
|
||
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
|
||
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
||
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
||
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsinglechapoff}}
|
||
|
||
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
|
||
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
||
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
||
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
||
|
||
\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
|
||
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
||
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
||
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
||
|
||
\CHAPPAGon
|
||
|
||
% \chapmacro - Chapter opening.
|
||
%
|
||
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
|
||
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
|
||
% Not used for @heading series.
|
||
%
|
||
% To test against our argument.
|
||
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
|
||
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
|
||
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else
|
||
\checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment.
|
||
\fi
|
||
% Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
|
||
\let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs
|
||
\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
|
||
\gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
|
||
\gdef\thissection{}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\def\temptype{#2}%
|
||
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
||
\gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
|
||
\gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
|
||
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
||
\gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
|
||
\gdef\thischapter{}}%
|
||
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
||
\toks0={#1}%
|
||
\xdef\currentchapterdefs{%
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
|
||
% \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
|
||
% commands in some of the translations.
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
|
||
\noexpand\thischapternum:
|
||
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\toks0={#1}%
|
||
\xdef\currentchapterdefs{%
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
|
||
% \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
|
||
% commands in some of the translations.
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
|
||
\noexpand\thischapternum:
|
||
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
|
||
% the preceding space.
|
||
\safewhatsit\domark
|
||
%
|
||
% Insert the chapter heading break.
|
||
\pchapsepmacro
|
||
%
|
||
% Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
|
||
% between here and the heading.
|
||
\let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs
|
||
\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
|
||
\domark
|
||
%
|
||
{%
|
||
\chapfonts \rm
|
||
\let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message
|
||
%
|
||
% Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the
|
||
% xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
|
||
% after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
|
||
\gdef\currentsection{#1}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
|
||
% number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
|
||
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
||
\def\toctype{unnchap}%
|
||
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
|
||
\def\toctype{omit}%
|
||
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
|
||
\def\toctype{app}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
|
||
\def\toctype{numchap}%
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
|
||
% \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
|
||
% entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
|
||
\writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
|
||
%
|
||
% For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
|
||
% the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
|
||
% been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
|
||
% text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
|
||
% being visible, for instance under high magnification.
|
||
\donoderef{#2}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Typeset the actual heading.
|
||
\nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
|
||
\vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
||
\unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
||
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
||
\def\centerparameters{%
|
||
\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
||
\leftskip = \rightskip
|
||
\parfillskip = 0pt
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
|
||
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
|
||
%
|
||
\newskip\secheadingskip
|
||
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
|
||
|
||
% Subsection titles.
|
||
\newskip\subsecheadingskip
|
||
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
|
||
|
||
% Subsubsection titles.
|
||
\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
|
||
\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Print any size, any type, section title.
|
||
%
|
||
% #1 is the text of the title,
|
||
% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec),
|
||
% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc),
|
||
% #4 is the section number.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\seckeyword{sec}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
|
||
{%
|
||
\def\sectionlevel{#2}%
|
||
\def\temptype{#3}%
|
||
%
|
||
% It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an
|
||
% environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is
|
||
% dubious), but not the others.
|
||
\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else
|
||
\checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment.
|
||
\fi
|
||
\let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading
|
||
%
|
||
% Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
||
\csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
|
||
%
|
||
% Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
|
||
\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
|
||
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
||
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
||
\gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
|
||
\gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
||
% Don't redefine \thissection.
|
||
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
||
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
||
\toks0={#1}%
|
||
\xdef\currentsectiondefs{%
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
|
||
% \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
|
||
% commands in some of the translations.
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
|
||
\noexpand\thissectionnum:
|
||
\noexpand\thissectionname}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
||
\toks0={#1}%
|
||
\xdef\currentsectiondefs{%
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
|
||
% \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
|
||
% commands in some of the translations.
|
||
\gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
|
||
\noexpand\thissectionnum:
|
||
\noexpand\thissectionname}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
|
||
% don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
|
||
% if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
|
||
\par
|
||
%
|
||
% Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
|
||
% the preceding space.
|
||
\safewhatsit\domark
|
||
%
|
||
% Insert space above the heading.
|
||
\csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
|
||
%
|
||
% Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
|
||
% between here and the heading.
|
||
\global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
|
||
\domark
|
||
%
|
||
% Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
|
||
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
||
\def\toctype{unn}%
|
||
\gdef\currentsection{#1}%
|
||
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
||
% for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
|
||
% and don't redefine \currentsection.
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
||
\def\toctype{omit}%
|
||
\let\sectionlevel=\empty
|
||
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
||
\def\toctype{app}%
|
||
\gdef\currentsection{#1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
||
\def\toctype{num}%
|
||
\gdef\currentsection{#1}%
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
|
||
\writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
|
||
% Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
|
||
\donoderef{#3}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
|
||
% That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
|
||
% preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
|
||
% \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
|
||
% break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
|
||
% section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
%
|
||
% Output the actual section heading.
|
||
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
|
||
\hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
|
||
\unhbox0 #1}%
|
||
}%
|
||
% Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
|
||
% Don't allow stretch, though.
|
||
\kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
|
||
%
|
||
% Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
|
||
% was followed by glue.
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
%
|
||
% We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
|
||
% glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
|
||
% discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
|
||
% (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
|
||
% or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
|
||
% obscuring the section heading with something else.
|
||
\vskip-\parskip
|
||
%
|
||
% This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
|
||
% \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
|
||
% and do the needful.
|
||
\penalty 10001
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{toc,}
|
||
% Table of contents.
|
||
\newwrite\tocfile
|
||
|
||
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
|
||
% Called from @chapter, etc.
|
||
%
|
||
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
|
||
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
|
||
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
|
||
% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
|
||
% destination to jump to.
|
||
%
|
||
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
|
||
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
|
||
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
|
||
% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
|
||
%
|
||
\newif\iftocfileopened
|
||
\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
|
||
%
|
||
\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
|
||
\edef\writetoctype{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
|
||
\iftocfileopened\else
|
||
\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
|
||
\global\tocfileopenedtrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\iflinks
|
||
{\atdummies
|
||
\edef\temp{%
|
||
\write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
||
\temp
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
|
||
% writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
|
||
% just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
|
||
% 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
|
||
% two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
|
||
% `1', and two named `2'.
|
||
\ifpdforxetex
|
||
\global\pdfmakepagedesttrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
|
||
% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
|
||
% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\activecatcodes{%
|
||
\catcode`\"=\active
|
||
\catcode`\$=\active
|
||
\catcode`\<=\active
|
||
\catcode`\>=\active
|
||
\catcode`\\=\active
|
||
\catcode`\^=\active
|
||
\catcode`\_=\active
|
||
\catcode`\|=\active
|
||
\catcode`\~=\active
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
|
||
\def\readtocfile{%
|
||
\setupdatafile
|
||
\activecatcodes
|
||
\input \tocreadfilename
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
||
\newcount\savepageno
|
||
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
|
||
|
||
% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\startcontents#1{%
|
||
% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
||
% start on an odd page, unlike chapters.
|
||
\contentsalignmacro
|
||
\immediate\closeout\tocfile
|
||
%
|
||
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
||
% It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
||
\chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
|
||
%
|
||
\savepageno = \pageno
|
||
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
||
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
||
\entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
||
%
|
||
% Roman numerals for page numbers.
|
||
\ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
|
||
\def\thistitle{}% no title in double-sided headings
|
||
% Record where the Roman numerals started.
|
||
\ifnum\romancount=0 \global\romancount=\pagecount \fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
|
||
% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
|
||
|
||
% Normal (long) toc.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\contents{%
|
||
\startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
|
||
\openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
|
||
\ifeof 1 \else
|
||
\readtocfile
|
||
\fi
|
||
\vfill \eject
|
||
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
||
\ifeof 1 \else
|
||
\pdfmakeoutlines
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\contentsendroman
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% And just the chapters.
|
||
\def\summarycontents{%
|
||
\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
|
||
%
|
||
\let\partentry = \shortpartentry
|
||
\let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
|
||
\let\appentry = \shortchapentry
|
||
\let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
|
||
% We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
||
\secfonts
|
||
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
|
||
\let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
|
||
\rm
|
||
\hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
||
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
||
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
|
||
\let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
|
||
\let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
|
||
\let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
||
\let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
||
\let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
||
\let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
||
\let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
||
\let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
||
\openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
|
||
\ifeof 1 \else
|
||
\readtocfile
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
\vfill \eject
|
||
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\contentsendroman
|
||
}
|
||
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
||
|
||
% Get ready to use Arabic numerals again
|
||
\def\contentsendroman{%
|
||
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
||
\global\pageno = \savepageno
|
||
%
|
||
% If \romancount > \arabiccount, the contents are at the end of the
|
||
% document. Otherwise, advance where the Arabic numerals start for
|
||
% the page numbers.
|
||
\ifnum\romancount>\arabiccount\else\global\arabiccount=\pagecount\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
||
% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
||
% This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
||
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
||
% But use \hss just in case.
|
||
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
||
% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
||
%
|
||
% We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
|
||
% with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
|
||
% left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
|
||
% chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
|
||
% there are before deciding ...
|
||
\hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
||
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
||
% The last argument is the page number.
|
||
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
||
|
||
% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
|
||
% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
|
||
% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
|
||
\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
|
||
\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{%
|
||
% Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading.
|
||
% This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the
|
||
% part heading, before a following chapter heading.
|
||
\vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
|
||
\penalty-300
|
||
\vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
|
||
\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% Parts, in the short toc.
|
||
\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
|
||
\penalty-300
|
||
\vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
|
||
\shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Chapters, in the main contents.
|
||
\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
||
|
||
% Chapters, in the short toc.
|
||
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
|
||
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
|
||
\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Appendices, in the main contents.
|
||
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\appendixbox#1{%
|
||
% We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
|
||
\hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}}
|
||
|
||
% Unnumbered chapters.
|
||
\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
|
||
\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
|
||
|
||
% Sections.
|
||
\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
||
\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
|
||
\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
||
|
||
% Subsections.
|
||
\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
||
\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
|
||
\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
||
|
||
% And subsubsections.
|
||
\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
||
\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
|
||
\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
||
|
||
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
||
% Same as \defaultparindent.
|
||
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
|
||
|
||
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
||
% page number.
|
||
%
|
||
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
||
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
||
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
||
\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
% Move the page numbers slightly to the right
|
||
\advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em
|
||
\chapentryfonts
|
||
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
||
\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
||
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
||
\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
||
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
||
\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
||
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
|
||
\let\tocentry = \entry
|
||
|
||
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
||
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
||
|
||
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
||
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
||
|
||
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
||
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
||
\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
||
\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{environments,}
|
||
% @foo ... @end foo.
|
||
|
||
% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
|
||
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
||
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
|
||
|
||
\envdef\tex{%
|
||
\setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
|
||
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
||
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
||
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
|
||
\catcode `\%=14
|
||
\catcode `\+=\other
|
||
\catcode `\"=\other
|
||
\catcode `\|=\other
|
||
\catcode `\<=\other
|
||
\catcode `\>=\other
|
||
\catcode `\`=\other
|
||
\catcode `\'=\other
|
||
%
|
||
% ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
|
||
% other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
|
||
\mathactive
|
||
%
|
||
% Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file.
|
||
\let\b=\ptexb
|
||
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
||
\let\c=\ptexc
|
||
\let\,=\ptexcomma
|
||
\let\.=\ptexdot
|
||
\let\dots=\ptexdots
|
||
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
||
\let\!=\ptexexclam
|
||
\let\i=\ptexi
|
||
\let\indent=\ptexindent
|
||
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
||
\let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
||
\let\+=\tabalign
|
||
\let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
||
\let\/=\ptexslash
|
||
\let\sp=\ptexsp
|
||
\let\*=\ptexstar
|
||
%\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode
|
||
\let\t=\ptext
|
||
\expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer
|
||
\let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
|
||
%
|
||
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
||
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
||
\def\@{@}%
|
||
}
|
||
% There is no need to define \Etex.
|
||
|
||
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
|
||
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
|
||
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
||
|
||
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
||
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
||
|
||
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
||
% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
||
% have any width.
|
||
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
||
|
||
% This space is always present above and below environments.
|
||
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
||
|
||
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
||
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
||
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
||
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
|
||
% =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
|
||
% \sectionheading, q.v.
|
||
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
|
||
\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
||
\endgraf
|
||
\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
||
\removelastskip
|
||
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
|
||
% Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text
|
||
% often leads into it.
|
||
\penalty100
|
||
\fi
|
||
\vskip\envskipamount
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
\def\afterenvbreak{{%
|
||
% =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
|
||
% \sectionheading, q.v.
|
||
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
|
||
\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
||
\endgraf
|
||
\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
||
\removelastskip
|
||
% it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
|
||
% or better ...
|
||
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
|
||
\vskip\envskipamount
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
|
||
% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
|
||
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
||
|
||
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
|
||
% environment contents.
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
||
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
||
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
||
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
||
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
||
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
||
\hskip\rskip}}
|
||
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
||
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
||
\hskip\rskip}}
|
||
%
|
||
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
||
|
||
% only require the font if @cartouche is actually used
|
||
\def\cartouchefontdefs{%
|
||
\font\circle=lcircle10\relax
|
||
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
||
}
|
||
\newdimen\circthick
|
||
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
||
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
||
|
||
|
||
\envdef\cartouche{%
|
||
\cartouchefontdefs
|
||
\ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
|
||
\startsavinginserts
|
||
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
||
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
|
||
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
||
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
||
\cartouter=\hsize
|
||
\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
||
% side, and for 6pt waste from
|
||
% each corner char, and rule thickness
|
||
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
||
%
|
||
% If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
|
||
% \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
|
||
% collide with the section heading.
|
||
\ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
|
||
%
|
||
\setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup
|
||
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
||
\carttop
|
||
\hbox\bgroup
|
||
\hskip\lskip
|
||
\vrule\kern3pt
|
||
\vbox\bgroup
|
||
\kern3pt
|
||
\hsize=\cartinner
|
||
\baselineskip=\normbskip
|
||
\lineskip=\normlskip
|
||
\parskip=\normpskip
|
||
\vskip -\parskip
|
||
\comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
|
||
}
|
||
\def\Ecartouche{%
|
||
\ifhmode\par\fi
|
||
\kern3pt
|
||
\egroup
|
||
\kern3pt\vrule
|
||
\hskip\rskip
|
||
\egroup
|
||
\cartbot
|
||
\egroup
|
||
\addgroupbox
|
||
\checkinserts
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
||
% inside a group.
|
||
\newdimen\nonfillparindent
|
||
\def\nonfillstart{%
|
||
\aboveenvbreak
|
||
\ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
|
||
\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
||
\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
||
\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
||
\parskip = 0pt
|
||
% Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
|
||
% the normal \indent.
|
||
\nonfillparindent=\parindent
|
||
\parindent = 0pt
|
||
\let\indent\nonfillindent
|
||
%
|
||
\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
||
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
||
\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
||
\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
||
\fi
|
||
\let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\obeyspaces
|
||
% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
|
||
% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
|
||
% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
|
||
% @indent.
|
||
\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
|
||
\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
|
||
\ifx\temp %
|
||
\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
|
||
\else%
|
||
\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
|
||
\fi%
|
||
}%
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
|
||
\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
|
||
|
||
% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
|
||
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
|
||
% This affects the following displayed environments:
|
||
% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
|
||
%
|
||
\def\smallword{small}
|
||
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
|
||
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
|
||
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
|
||
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
|
||
% end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
|
||
% line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
|
||
% we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
|
||
% to change the fonts afterward.
|
||
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
|
||
\smallexamplefonts \rm
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
|
||
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
|
||
\smallexamplefonts \rm
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
|
||
% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
|
||
\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
|
||
\expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
|
||
\expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
|
||
\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
|
||
\makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
|
||
\makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
|
||
% @example: same as @lisp.
|
||
%
|
||
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
|
||
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
||
%
|
||
\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
|
||
\nonfillstart
|
||
\tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
|
||
\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
|
||
\gobble % eat return
|
||
}
|
||
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
|
||
%
|
||
\makedispenvdef{display}{%
|
||
\nonfillstart
|
||
\gobble
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
||
%
|
||
\makedispenvdef{format}{%
|
||
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
||
\nonfillstart
|
||
\gobble
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
|
||
\envdef\flushleft{%
|
||
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
||
\nonfillstart
|
||
\gobble
|
||
}
|
||
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
|
||
|
||
% @flushright.
|
||
%
|
||
\envdef\flushright{%
|
||
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
||
\nonfillstart
|
||
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
|
||
\gobble
|
||
}
|
||
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
|
||
% justification. From plain.tex.
|
||
\envdef\raggedright{%
|
||
\rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
|
||
}
|
||
\let\Eraggedright\par
|
||
|
||
\envdef\raggedleft{%
|
||
\parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
|
||
\spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
|
||
\hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
|
||
% badness reporting.
|
||
}
|
||
\let\Eraggedleft\par
|
||
|
||
\envdef\raggedcenter{%
|
||
\parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
|
||
\spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
|
||
\hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
|
||
% badness reporting.
|
||
}
|
||
\let\Eraggedcenter\par
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
||
% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
|
||
% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
|
||
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
|
||
%
|
||
\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\quotationstart{%
|
||
\indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
|
||
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
||
\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
||
\fi
|
||
\parsearg\quotationlabel
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
||
% doing normal filling.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\Equotation{%
|
||
\par
|
||
\ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
|
||
% indent a bit.
|
||
\leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
|
||
|
||
% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
|
||
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
||
{\bf #1: }%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
|
||
% has no optional argument.
|
||
%
|
||
\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\indentedblockstart{%
|
||
{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
||
\parindent=0pt
|
||
%
|
||
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
||
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
||
\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
||
\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\Eindentedblock{%
|
||
\par
|
||
{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
|
||
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
|
||
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
|
||
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
|
||
%
|
||
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
|
||
%
|
||
% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
|
||
% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
|
||
% verbatim line.
|
||
\def\dospecials{%
|
||
\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
|
||
\do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
|
||
\do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
|
||
% Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
|
||
% @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
|
||
% @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
|
||
%\do\`\do\'%
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% [Knuth] p. 380
|
||
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
|
||
\def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
|
||
%
|
||
% Setup for the @verb command.
|
||
%
|
||
% Eight spaces for a tab
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
||
\gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setupverb{%
|
||
\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
||
\def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
|
||
\setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
|
||
\tabeightspaces
|
||
% Respect line breaks,
|
||
% print special symbols as themselves, and
|
||
% make each space count
|
||
% must do in this order:
|
||
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
|
||
%
|
||
% Real tab expansion.
|
||
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
|
||
%
|
||
% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
|
||
% tabs.
|
||
\newbox\verbbox
|
||
\def\starttabbox{\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
|
||
%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
||
\gdef\tabexpand{%
|
||
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
||
\def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
|
||
\dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
|
||
\divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
|
||
\multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
|
||
\advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
|
||
\wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox
|
||
\leavevmode\box\verbbox \starttabbox
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
|
||
% start the verbatim environment.
|
||
\def\setupverbatim{%
|
||
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
||
\nonfillstart
|
||
\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
||
\def\par{\egroup\leavevmode\box\verbbox\endgraf\starttabbox}%
|
||
\tabexpand
|
||
\setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
|
||
% Respect line breaks,
|
||
% print special symbols as themselves, and
|
||
% make each space count.
|
||
% Must do in this order:
|
||
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
|
||
% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
|
||
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
|
||
%
|
||
% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
|
||
%
|
||
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
|
||
\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
%
|
||
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
|
||
%
|
||
%
|
||
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
|
||
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
|
||
%
|
||
% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
|
||
%
|
||
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
|
||
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
|
||
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
|
||
%
|
||
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
|
||
%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\ =\active
|
||
\obeylines %
|
||
% ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
|
||
% of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
|
||
% line in the output.
|
||
\xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{%
|
||
\starttabbox#2\egroup\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
|
||
% We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
|
||
% without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
|
||
% The \egroup ends the \verbbox started at the end of the last line in
|
||
% the block.
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
%
|
||
\envdef\verbatim{%
|
||
\setnormaldispenv\setupverbatim\doverbatim
|
||
}
|
||
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
|
||
{%
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\setupverbatim
|
||
{%
|
||
\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
||
\wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
|
||
\edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 }
|
||
\expandafter
|
||
}\expandafter\starttabbox\tmp\egroup
|
||
\afterenvbreak
|
||
}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @copying ... @end copying.
|
||
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
|
||
%
|
||
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
|
||
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
|
||
% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
|
||
% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
|
||
% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
|
||
% possible is desirable.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
|
||
\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\insertcopying{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
|
||
\scanexp\copyingtext
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{defuns,}
|
||
% @defun etc.
|
||
|
||
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
||
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
||
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
||
\newcount\defunpenalty
|
||
|
||
% Start the processing of @deffn:
|
||
\def\startdefun{%
|
||
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
|
||
\medbreak
|
||
\defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
|
||
% following @def command, see below.
|
||
\else
|
||
% If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
|
||
% which is there to keep the function description together with its
|
||
% header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
|
||
% break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
|
||
% by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
|
||
% commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
|
||
% a break between a section heading and a defun.
|
||
%
|
||
% As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
|
||
% with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
|
||
% sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
|
||
% @def command.
|
||
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
|
||
% But do insert the glue.
|
||
\medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\parindent=0in
|
||
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
||
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\dodefunx#1{%
|
||
% First, check whether we are in the right environment:
|
||
\checkenv#1%
|
||
%
|
||
% As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
|
||
% It's not a great place, though.
|
||
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
|
||
%
|
||
% And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
|
||
\expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
|
||
|
||
% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
% call \deffnheader:
|
||
#1#2 \endheader
|
||
% common ending:
|
||
\interlinepenalty = 10000
|
||
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
|
||
\endgraf
|
||
\nobreak\vskip -\parskip
|
||
\penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
|
||
% Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
|
||
% rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
|
||
\checkparencounts
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
|
||
|
||
% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
|
||
% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\makedefun#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
|
||
\edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
|
||
\makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
|
||
\temp
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) }
|
||
%
|
||
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
|
||
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
|
||
\envdef#1{%
|
||
\startdefun
|
||
\doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
|
||
\parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
|
||
\def#3%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
|
||
\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
|
||
|
||
% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
|
||
% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
|
||
% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\onword
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
|
||
= \empty
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\offword
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
|
||
= \relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
|
||
must be on|off}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
||
%
|
||
% If SUBTOPIC is present, precede it with a space, and call \doind.
|
||
% (At some time during the 20th century, this made a two-level entry in an
|
||
% index such as the operation index. Nobody seemed to notice the change in
|
||
% behaviour though.)
|
||
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
||
\def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
||
\ifx\thirdarg\empty
|
||
\doind{#1}{#2}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\doind{#1}{#2\space#3}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Untyped functions:
|
||
|
||
% @deffn category name args
|
||
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
|
||
|
||
% @deffn category class name args
|
||
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
||
|
||
% \defopon {category on}class name args
|
||
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
||
|
||
% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
|
||
%
|
||
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
|
||
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
|
||
\defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Typed functions:
|
||
|
||
% @deftypefn category type name args
|
||
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
|
||
|
||
% @deftypeop category class type name args
|
||
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
||
|
||
% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
|
||
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
||
|
||
% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
|
||
%
|
||
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
||
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
||
\doingtypefntrue
|
||
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Typed variables:
|
||
|
||
% @deftypevr category type var args
|
||
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
|
||
|
||
% @deftypecv category class type var args
|
||
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
||
|
||
% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
|
||
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
||
|
||
% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
|
||
%
|
||
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
||
\dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
||
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Untyped variables:
|
||
|
||
% @defvr category var args
|
||
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
|
||
|
||
% @defcv category class var args
|
||
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
||
|
||
% \defcvof {category of}class var args
|
||
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
|
||
|
||
% Types:
|
||
|
||
% @deftp category name args
|
||
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
|
||
\doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
||
\defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
|
||
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
||
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
|
||
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
|
||
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
||
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
||
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
|
||
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
||
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
|
||
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
|
||
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
||
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
||
|
||
% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
|
||
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
|
||
% #2 is the return type, if any.
|
||
% #3 is the function name.
|
||
%
|
||
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
|
||
\par
|
||
% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
|
||
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
||
%
|
||
% Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
|
||
% on a line by itself.
|
||
\rettypeownlinefalse
|
||
\ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
|
||
% then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
|
||
\rettypeownlinetrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
|
||
% distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
|
||
% just below it.
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
|
||
%
|
||
% Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
|
||
% least two.
|
||
\tempnum = 2
|
||
%
|
||
% The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
|
||
% we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
|
||
\dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
|
||
%
|
||
% If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
|
||
\ifrettypeownline
|
||
\advance\tempnum by 1
|
||
\def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\def\maybeshapeline{}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% The continuations:
|
||
\dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
|
||
%
|
||
% The final paragraph shape:
|
||
\parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
|
||
%
|
||
% Put the category name at the right margin.
|
||
\noindent
|
||
\hbox to 0pt{%
|
||
\hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
|
||
% \hsize has to be shortened this way:
|
||
\kern\leftskip
|
||
% Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
|
||
}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
|
||
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
||
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
||
{%
|
||
% defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
|
||
% . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
|
||
% . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
|
||
% common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
|
||
% tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
|
||
% . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
|
||
% . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
|
||
% one has made identifiers using them :).
|
||
\df \tt
|
||
\def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
|
||
\ifx\temp\empty\else
|
||
\tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
|
||
\ifrettypeownline
|
||
% put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
|
||
\hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
|
||
\else
|
||
\space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi % no return type
|
||
#3% output function name
|
||
}%
|
||
{\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont
|
||
%
|
||
\boldbrax
|
||
% arguments will be output next, if any.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
|
||
% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
|
||
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
|
||
% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\defunargs#1{%
|
||
% use sl by default (not ttsl),
|
||
% tt for the names.
|
||
\df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
|
||
%
|
||
% On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
|
||
% want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so
|
||
% leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
|
||
% Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
|
||
% and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`.
|
||
\def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
|
||
#1%
|
||
\sl\hyphenchar\font=45
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\activeparens{%
|
||
\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
|
||
\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
|
||
\catcode`\&=\active
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
||
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
||
|
||
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
||
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
||
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
||
{
|
||
\activeparens
|
||
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
||
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
||
\global\let& = \&
|
||
|
||
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
||
\gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
|
||
}
|
||
\let\ampchar\&
|
||
|
||
\newcount\parencount
|
||
|
||
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
||
\newif\ifampseen
|
||
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
|
||
|
||
\def\parenfont{%
|
||
\ifampseen
|
||
% At the first level, print parens in roman,
|
||
% otherwise use the default font.
|
||
\ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
|
||
\else
|
||
% The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
|
||
% the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
|
||
\sf
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
|
||
\ifampseen
|
||
\ifnum\parencount=1
|
||
#1%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
|
||
|
||
\def\opnr{%
|
||
\global\advance\parencount by 1
|
||
{\parenfont(}%
|
||
\infirstlevel \bfafterword
|
||
}
|
||
\def\clnr{%
|
||
{\parenfont)}%
|
||
\infirstlevel \sl
|
||
\global\advance\parencount by -1
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newcount\brackcount
|
||
\def\lbrb{%
|
||
\global\advance\brackcount by 1
|
||
{\bf[}%
|
||
}
|
||
\def\rbrb{%
|
||
{\bf]}%
|
||
\global\advance\brackcount by -1
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\checkparencounts{%
|
||
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
|
||
\ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
|
||
}
|
||
% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
|
||
% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
|
||
\def\badparencount{%
|
||
\message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
|
||
\global\parencount=0
|
||
}
|
||
\def\badbrackcount{%
|
||
\message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
|
||
\global\brackcount=0
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{macros,}
|
||
% @macro.
|
||
|
||
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
|
||
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
|
||
\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
|
||
\newwrite\macscribble
|
||
\def\scantokens#1{%
|
||
\toks0={#1}%
|
||
\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
|
||
\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
|
||
\immediate\closeout\macscribble
|
||
\input \jobname.tmp
|
||
}
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
% Used at the time of macro expansion.
|
||
% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted
|
||
\def\scanmacro#1{%
|
||
\newlinechar`\^^M
|
||
\def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Process the macro body under the current catcode regime.
|
||
\scantokens{#1@comment}%
|
||
%
|
||
% The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and
|
||
% can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla
|
||
% in math mode.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Used for copying and captions
|
||
\def\scanexp#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
|
||
\newtoks\macname % Macro name
|
||
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
|
||
|
||
% List of all defined macros in the form
|
||
% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2...
|
||
% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
|
||
% if there is a need.
|
||
\def\macrolist{}
|
||
|
||
% Add the macro to \macrolist
|
||
\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
|
||
\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
|
||
\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}%
|
||
\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Utility routines.
|
||
% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
|
||
% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
|
||
% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\cslet#1#2{%
|
||
\expandafter\let
|
||
\csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
|
||
\csname#2\endcsname
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
|
||
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
|
||
{\catcode`\@=11
|
||
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
|
||
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
|
||
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
|
||
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
|
||
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
|
||
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
|
||
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
|
||
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
|
||
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
|
||
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
|
||
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
|
||
% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
|
||
%
|
||
% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
|
||
% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
|
||
% confine the change to the current group.
|
||
%
|
||
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
|
||
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
|
||
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
|
||
\catcode`\"=\other
|
||
\catcode`\+=\other
|
||
\catcode`\<=\other
|
||
\catcode`\>=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^=\other
|
||
\catcode`\_=\other
|
||
\catcode`\|=\other
|
||
\catcode`\~=\other
|
||
\passthroughcharstrue
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
|
||
\scanctxt
|
||
\catcode`\@=\other
|
||
\catcode`\\=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^M=\other
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
|
||
\scanctxt
|
||
\catcode`\ =\other
|
||
\catcode`\@=\other
|
||
\catcode`\{=\other
|
||
\catcode`\}=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^M=\other
|
||
\usembodybackslash
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode
|
||
% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside
|
||
% an argument to another Texinfo command.
|
||
\def\macroargctxt{%
|
||
\scanctxt
|
||
\catcode`\ =\active
|
||
\catcode`\@=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^M=\other
|
||
\catcode`\\=\active
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces
|
||
\scanctxt
|
||
\catcode`\@=\other
|
||
\catcode`\{=\other
|
||
\catcode`\}=\other
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
|
||
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
|
||
% where N is the macro parameter number.
|
||
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
|
||
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
|
||
%
|
||
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
|
||
@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
|
||
@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
|
||
}
|
||
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
|
||
|
||
\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
|
||
|
||
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
||
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
||
|
||
\def\macroxxx#1{%
|
||
\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
|
||
\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
|
||
\paramno=0\relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
|
||
\if\paramno>256\relax
|
||
\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
|
||
\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
||
\else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
|
||
\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
|
||
\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
|
||
\addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\begingroup \macrobodyctxt
|
||
\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
|
||
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
|
||
\fi}
|
||
|
||
\parseargdef\unmacro{%
|
||
\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
|
||
\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
|
||
\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
|
||
% Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
|
||
\let\commondummyword\unmacrodo
|
||
\xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\else
|
||
\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
|
||
% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
|
||
\ifx #1\relax
|
||
% remove this
|
||
\else
|
||
\noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to
|
||
% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list.
|
||
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
|
||
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
|
||
\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
|
||
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
|
||
% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a
|
||
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
|
||
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
|
||
|
||
% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro.
|
||
% Set \paramno to the number of arguments,
|
||
% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a
|
||
% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params
|
||
% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are
|
||
% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
|
||
% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
|
||
% defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
|
||
%
|
||
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
|
||
%
|
||
% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see
|
||
% \parsemmanyargdef.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\parsemargdef#1;{%
|
||
\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
|
||
\let\hash\relax
|
||
% \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions
|
||
\let\xeatspaces\relax
|
||
\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
|
||
\ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
|
||
\paramno0\relax
|
||
\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
|
||
\if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
||
\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
|
||
\advance\paramno by 1
|
||
\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
|
||
{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
|
||
\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
|
||
\fi\next}
|
||
|
||
% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody
|
||
%
|
||
% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since
|
||
% rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
|
||
%
|
||
% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro
|
||
% body to be transformed.
|
||
% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro.
|
||
%
|
||
{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{%
|
||
\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
|
||
{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{%
|
||
\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
|
||
|
||
% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names.
|
||
\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
|
||
\catcode `@=11\relax
|
||
|
||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||
|
||
% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
|
||
% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
|
||
% processed again to replace the arguments.
|
||
%
|
||
% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
|
||
% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
|
||
% the catcode regime under which the body was input).
|
||
%
|
||
% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
|
||
% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error).
|
||
%
|
||
% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
|
||
% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
|
||
% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
|
||
% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
|
||
% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
|
||
% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
|
||
\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
|
||
\if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
|
||
\edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
|
||
\expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
|
||
\expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
|
||
% Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
|
||
% don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
|
||
% \xdef .
|
||
\expandafter\edef\tempa
|
||
{\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
|
||
\advance\paramno by 1\relax
|
||
\fi\next}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\let\endargs@\relax
|
||
\let\nil@\relax
|
||
\def\nilm@{\nil@}%
|
||
\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
|
||
|
||
% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
|
||
% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros
|
||
% macarg.ARGNAME
|
||
%
|
||
% #1 is the macro name
|
||
% #2 is the list of argument names
|
||
% #3 is the list of argument values
|
||
\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
|
||
\def\macargdeflist@{}%
|
||
\def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
|
||
\def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
|
||
\def\macroname{#1}%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\macroargctxt
|
||
\def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
|
||
\def\@tempa{#3}%
|
||
\ifx\@tempa\empty
|
||
\setemptyargvalues@
|
||
\else
|
||
\getargvals@@
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\getargvals@@{%
|
||
\ifx\paramlist\nilm@
|
||
% Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
|
||
\ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\let\next\macargexpandinbody@
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
|
||
% No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
|
||
% macros to empty.
|
||
\let\next\setemptyargvalues@
|
||
\else
|
||
% pop current arg name into \@tempb
|
||
\def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
|
||
\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
|
||
% pop current argument value into \@tempc
|
||
\def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
|
||
\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
|
||
% Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
|
||
% First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
|
||
\expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
|
||
\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
|
||
\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
|
||
\edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
|
||
\push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
|
||
\let\next\getargvals@@
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\next
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\push@#1#2{%
|
||
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
|
||
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
|
||
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
|
||
\expandafter#1#2}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
|
||
% in macro \@tempa.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\macvalstoargs@{%
|
||
% To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
|
||
% within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
|
||
% values into respective token registers.
|
||
%
|
||
% First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\paramno0\relax
|
||
% Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
|
||
% value into a new token list register \toks#N
|
||
\expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
|
||
% Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
|
||
% values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
|
||
% are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
|
||
\edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
|
||
% Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
|
||
% which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
|
||
% group.
|
||
\expandafter
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\macargexpandinbody@{%
|
||
\expandafter
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\macargdeflist@
|
||
% First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
|
||
% is in \@tempa .
|
||
\macvalstoargs@
|
||
% Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
|
||
% with \@tempb .
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
|
||
% Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
|
||
% \egroup .
|
||
\ifx\@tempb\gobble
|
||
\let\@tempc\relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\@tempc\egroup
|
||
\fi
|
||
% And now we do the real job:
|
||
\edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
|
||
\@tempd
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
|
||
\if#1;\let\next\relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\next\putargsintokens@
|
||
% First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
|
||
% alias \@tempb .
|
||
\toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
|
||
% Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
|
||
\expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
|
||
\advance\paramno by 1\relax
|
||
\fi
|
||
\next
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setemptyargvalues@{%
|
||
\ifx\paramlist\nilm@
|
||
\let\next\macargexpandinbody@
|
||
\else
|
||
\expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
|
||
\let\next\setemptyargvalues@
|
||
\fi
|
||
\next
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
|
||
\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
|
||
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
|
||
\push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
|
||
\def\paramlist{#2}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% #1 is the element target macro
|
||
% #2 is the list macro
|
||
% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
|
||
\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
|
||
\def#1{#3}%
|
||
\def#2{#4}%
|
||
}
|
||
\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
|
||
\long\def#1{#3}%
|
||
\long\def#2{#4}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||
|
||
|
||
% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody.
|
||
% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for
|
||
% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}".
|
||
% \paramno is the number of parameters
|
||
% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3,"
|
||
% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
|
||
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
|
||
% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\defmacro{%
|
||
\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
|
||
\ifnum\paramno=1
|
||
\def\xeatspaces##1{##1}%
|
||
% This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't
|
||
% use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost
|
||
% when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based
|
||
% commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly.
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion
|
||
\fi
|
||
\ifcase\paramno
|
||
% 0
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
||
\bgroup
|
||
\noexpand\spaceisspace
|
||
\noexpand\endlineisspace
|
||
\noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name.
|
||
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{%
|
||
\egroup
|
||
\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
|
||
\or % 1
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
||
\bgroup
|
||
\noexpand\braceorline
|
||
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
|
||
\egroup
|
||
\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\else % at most 9
|
||
\ifnum\paramno<10\relax
|
||
% @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument
|
||
% @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a
|
||
% comma.
|
||
% @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list.
|
||
% @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted.
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
||
\bgroup
|
||
\noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the
|
||
\noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space.
|
||
\noexpand\expandafter
|
||
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}%
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
|
||
\noexpand\passargtomacro
|
||
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}%
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
|
||
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}%
|
||
\expandafter\expandafter
|
||
\expandafter\xdef
|
||
\expandafter\expandafter
|
||
\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
|
||
\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
|
||
\else % 10 or more:
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
||
\noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody
|
||
\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi}
|
||
|
||
\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes
|
||
|
||
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
|
||
|
||
|
||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||
%
|
||
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape
|
||
@catcode`@_=11 % private names
|
||
@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator
|
||
|
||
% \passargtomacro#1#2 -
|
||
% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2
|
||
% compressed to one.
|
||
%
|
||
% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use
|
||
% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where
|
||
% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to
|
||
% an auxiliary file for an index entry).
|
||
%
|
||
% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to
|
||
% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is
|
||
%
|
||
% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input)
|
||
%
|
||
% where:
|
||
% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call
|
||
% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro
|
||
% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing
|
||
% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next
|
||
|
||
@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{%
|
||
@add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\%
|
||
}
|
||
@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax
|
||
|
||
% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
|
||
% #2 - PENDING_BS
|
||
% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
|
||
% #4 used to look ahead
|
||
%
|
||
% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument;
|
||
% otherwise, remove the next token.
|
||
@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{%
|
||
@ifx#4\%
|
||
@expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish
|
||
@else
|
||
@expandafter@add_segment
|
||
@fi#1!{#2}#4#4%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
|
||
% #2 - PENDING_BS
|
||
% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
|
||
% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled.
|
||
% #5 looks ahead
|
||
%
|
||
% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead.
|
||
@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{%
|
||
@add_segment#1\!{}#5#5%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
@gdef@is_fi{@fi}
|
||
|
||
% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
|
||
% #2 - PENDING_BS
|
||
% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
|
||
% #4 is input stream until next backslash
|
||
%
|
||
% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a
|
||
% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash.
|
||
% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish,
|
||
% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until
|
||
% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent
|
||
% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been
|
||
% added to ARG_RESULT.
|
||
@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{%
|
||
@ifx#3@_finish
|
||
@call_the_macro#1!%
|
||
@else
|
||
% append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment
|
||
@expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi
|
||
% this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead.
|
||
% we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how
|
||
% long #4 is.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% #1 - THE_MACRO
|
||
% #2 - ARG_RESULT
|
||
% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the
|
||
% conditional.
|
||
@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}}
|
||
|
||
}
|
||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||
|
||
% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks
|
||
% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context
|
||
% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then,
|
||
% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular
|
||
% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
|
||
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
|
||
\ifx\nchar\bgroup
|
||
\macroargctxt
|
||
\expandafter\passargtomacro
|
||
\else
|
||
\macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg
|
||
\fi \macnamexxx}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @alias.
|
||
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
|
||
% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
|
||
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
|
||
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
|
||
{%
|
||
\expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
|
||
\addtomacrolist{#1}%
|
||
\xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\next
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{cross references,}
|
||
|
||
\newwrite\auxfile
|
||
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
||
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
||
|
||
% @inforef is relatively simple.
|
||
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
||
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
|
||
\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
||
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
||
|
||
% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
|
||
% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
|
||
% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
|
||
% @node foo , bar , ...
|
||
% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
|
||
%
|
||
% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
|
||
% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
|
||
\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
|
||
\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode}
|
||
|
||
% Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex
|
||
% conditional.
|
||
% \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need
|
||
% that here.
|
||
\def\omittopnode{%
|
||
\ifx\lastnode\wordTop
|
||
\expandafter\ignorenode\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\wordTop{Top}
|
||
|
||
% Until the next @node or @bye command, divert output to a box that is not
|
||
% output.
|
||
\def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup\def\node{\egroup\node}%
|
||
\ignorenodebye
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
{\let\bye\relax
|
||
\gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef}
|
||
\gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}}
|
||
% The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer
|
||
|
||
\let\lastnode=\empty
|
||
|
||
% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
|
||
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\donoderef#1{%
|
||
\ifx\lastnode\empty\else
|
||
\setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
|
||
\global\let\lastnode=\empty
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
|
||
%
|
||
\newcount\savesfregister
|
||
%
|
||
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
|
||
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
|
||
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
|
||
|
||
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
|
||
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
|
||
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection,
|
||
% or the anchor name.
|
||
% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
|
||
% empty for anchors.
|
||
% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
|
||
%
|
||
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
|
||
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
|
||
% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setref#1#2{%
|
||
\pdfmkdest{#1}%
|
||
\iflinks
|
||
{%
|
||
\requireauxfile
|
||
\atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
|
||
% match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX.
|
||
\def\value##1{##1}%
|
||
\edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
|
||
\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
|
||
##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
|
||
}%
|
||
\toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}%
|
||
\immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
|
||
\immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
|
||
\safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
|
||
% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
|
||
% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
|
||
% variable, now it's official.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\onword
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
|
||
= \empty
|
||
\else\ifx\temp\offword
|
||
\expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
|
||
= \relax
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
|
||
must be on|off}%
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
%
|
||
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
|
||
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
|
||
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
|
||
% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX}
|
||
\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX}
|
||
\def\ref{\xrefXX}
|
||
|
||
\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX}
|
||
\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]}
|
||
%
|
||
\newbox\toprefbox
|
||
\newbox\printedrefnamebox
|
||
\newbox\infofilenamebox
|
||
\newbox\printedmanualbox
|
||
%
|
||
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
||
\unsepspaces
|
||
%
|
||
% Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
|
||
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
||
\setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
|
||
%
|
||
\def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
|
||
\setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
|
||
%
|
||
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
||
\setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
|
||
%
|
||
% If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
|
||
% the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
|
||
\ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
|
||
% No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
|
||
% Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
|
||
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
% Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
|
||
% the square brackets if we have it.
|
||
\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
|
||
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
|
||
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifhavexrefs
|
||
% We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
||
\def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
||
\else
|
||
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
||
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
||
\fi%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Make link in pdf output.
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
% For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
|
||
{\indexnofonts
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
% This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
|
||
% etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
|
||
% #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
|
||
\getfilename{#4}%
|
||
%
|
||
% This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
|
||
% spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
|
||
\setpdfdestname{#1}%
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\pdfdestname\empty
|
||
\def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\leavevmode
|
||
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
||
\ifnum\filenamelength>0
|
||
goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}%
|
||
\else
|
||
goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}%
|
||
\setcolor{\linkcolor}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
||
\else
|
||
% For XeTeX
|
||
{\indexnofonts
|
||
\makevalueexpandable
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
% This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
|
||
% etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
|
||
% #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
|
||
\getfilename{#4}%
|
||
%
|
||
% This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
|
||
% spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
|
||
\setpdfdestname{#1}%
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\pdfdestname\empty
|
||
\def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\leavevmode
|
||
\ifnum\filenamelength>0
|
||
% With default settings,
|
||
% XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers.
|
||
% In this case, the replaced destination names of
|
||
% remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement,
|
||
% you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
|
||
% If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+),
|
||
% this command line option is no longer necessary
|
||
% because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special.
|
||
\special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
|
||
<< /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
|
||
<< /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}%
|
||
\setcolor{\linkcolor}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
{%
|
||
% Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
|
||
% include an _ in the xref name, etc.
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\def\value##1{##1}%
|
||
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
|
||
\csname XR#1-title\endcsname
|
||
}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
|
||
% instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by
|
||
% \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string.
|
||
\iffloat\Xthisreftitle
|
||
% If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
|
||
% print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
|
||
\ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
|
||
\refx{#1-snt}{}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\printedrefname
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
|
||
% "in MANUALNAME".
|
||
\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
|
||
\space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
% node/anchor (non-float) references.
|
||
%
|
||
% If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
|
||
% empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
|
||
% find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
||
% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
|
||
% this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
|
||
% again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
||
%
|
||
\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
|
||
% Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
|
||
%
|
||
\crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
|
||
% Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
|
||
% printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
|
||
% the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
|
||
%
|
||
\crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\else
|
||
% Reference within this manual.
|
||
%
|
||
% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
|
||
% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
|
||
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
||
\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
|
||
\xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
|
||
%
|
||
% But we always want a comma and a space:
|
||
,\space
|
||
%
|
||
% output the `page 3'.
|
||
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
||
% Add a , if xref followed by a space
|
||
\if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,%
|
||
\else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB
|
||
\else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @*
|
||
\else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE
|
||
\else\ifx\
|
||
\tokenafterxref ,% @NL
|
||
\else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie
|
||
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\endlink
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
|
||
%
|
||
% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
|
||
% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
|
||
% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
|
||
%
|
||
% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
|
||
% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
|
||
% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
|
||
% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
|
||
% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
|
||
%
|
||
% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
|
||
% reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\crossmanualxref#1{%
|
||
\setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
|
||
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
|
||
\ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
|
||
\ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
|
||
\putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
#1%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
|
||
% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
|
||
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
|
||
% one that Bob is working on :).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
|
||
|
||
% Things referred to by \setref.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\Ynothing{}
|
||
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
|
||
\def\Ynumbered{%
|
||
\ifnum\secno=0
|
||
\putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
|
||
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
||
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
|
||
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
||
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
||
\else
|
||
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\def\Yappendix{%
|
||
\ifnum\secno=0
|
||
\putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
|
||
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
||
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
|
||
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
||
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
||
\else
|
||
\putwordSection@tie
|
||
@char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX
|
||
% is output afterwards if non-empty.
|
||
\def\refx#1#2{%
|
||
\requireauxfile
|
||
{%
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\def\value##1{##1}%
|
||
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
|
||
\csname XR#1\endcsname
|
||
}%
|
||
\ifx\thisrefX\relax
|
||
% If not defined, say something at least.
|
||
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
||
\iflinks
|
||
\ifhavexrefs
|
||
{\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
|
||
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
||
\global\warnedxrefstrue
|
||
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
% It's defined, so just use it.
|
||
\thisrefX
|
||
\fi
|
||
#2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control
|
||
% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence
|
||
% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float
|
||
% type, we have more work to do.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
|
||
{% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences.
|
||
% \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands
|
||
% like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition.
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\def\value##1{##1}%
|
||
\xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
|
||
}%
|
||
%
|
||
\bgroup
|
||
\expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}%
|
||
\egroup
|
||
% We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on
|
||
% TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with
|
||
% thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does
|
||
% when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax.
|
||
%
|
||
% Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
|
||
\expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
|
||
% it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
|
||
\expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
|
||
\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
|
||
%
|
||
% Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
|
||
\toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
|
||
\else
|
||
% had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
|
||
\toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
|
||
% for later use in \listoffloats.
|
||
\expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
|
||
{\safexrefname}}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
||
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
||
% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file.
|
||
%
|
||
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
||
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
||
|
||
% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it.
|
||
\def\requireauxfile{%
|
||
\iflinks
|
||
\tryauxfile
|
||
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
||
\immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
||
\fi
|
||
\global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\tryauxfile{%
|
||
\openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
||
\ifeof 1 \else
|
||
\readdatafile{aux}%
|
||
\global\havexrefstrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\setupdatafile{%
|
||
\catcode`\^^@=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^A=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^B=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^C=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^D=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^E=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^F=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^G=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^H=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^K=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^L=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^N=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^P=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^R=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^S=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^T=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^U=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^V=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^W=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^X=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^[=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^\=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^]=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^^=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^^_=\other
|
||
\catcode`\^=\other
|
||
%
|
||
% Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
|
||
\catcode`\~=\other
|
||
\catcode`\[=\other
|
||
\catcode`\]=\other
|
||
\catcode`\"=\other
|
||
\catcode`\_=\other
|
||
\catcode`\|=\other
|
||
\catcode`\<=\other
|
||
\catcode`\>=\other
|
||
\catcode`\$=\other
|
||
\catcode`\#=\other
|
||
\catcode`\&=\other
|
||
\catcode`\%=\other
|
||
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
|
||
%
|
||
\catcode`\\=\active
|
||
%
|
||
% @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
|
||
\catcode`\{=1
|
||
\catcode`\}=2
|
||
\catcode`\@=0
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\readdatafile#1{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\setupdatafile
|
||
\input\jobname.#1
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{insertions,}
|
||
% including footnotes.
|
||
|
||
\newcount \footnoteno
|
||
|
||
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
||
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
||
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
||
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
||
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
||
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
||
|
||
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
|
||
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
||
|
||
{\catcode `\@=11
|
||
%
|
||
% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
||
\gdef\footnote{%
|
||
\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
||
\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
||
%
|
||
% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
||
% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
||
\let\@sf\empty
|
||
\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
||
\unskip
|
||
\thisfootno\@sf
|
||
\dofootnote
|
||
}%
|
||
|
||
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
||
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
||
%
|
||
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
|
||
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
||
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\dofootnote{%
|
||
\insert\footins\bgroup
|
||
%
|
||
% Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot
|
||
% more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.)
|
||
\let\footnote=\errfootnotenest
|
||
%
|
||
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
||
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
||
% So reset some parameters.
|
||
\hsize=\txipagewidth
|
||
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
||
\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
||
\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
||
\floatingpenalty\@MM
|
||
\leftskip\z@skip
|
||
\rightskip\z@skip
|
||
\spaceskip\z@skip
|
||
\xspaceskip\z@skip
|
||
\parindent\defaultparindent
|
||
%
|
||
\smallfonts \rm
|
||
%
|
||
% Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
|
||
% to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
|
||
% hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
|
||
% text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
|
||
\let\noindent = \relax
|
||
%
|
||
% Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
|
||
% footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
|
||
\everypar = {\hang}%
|
||
\textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
||
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
||
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
||
\footstrut
|
||
%
|
||
% Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
|
||
\futurelet\next\fo@t
|
||
}
|
||
}%end \catcode `\@=11
|
||
|
||
\def\errfootnotenest{%
|
||
\errhelp=\EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex,
|
||
even though they work in makeinfo; sorry}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\errfootnoteheading{%
|
||
\errhelp=\EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
|
||
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
|
||
% would be lost.
|
||
% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
|
||
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
|
||
% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
|
||
%
|
||
% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
|
||
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
|
||
% out prematurely.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\startsavinginserts{%
|
||
\ifx \insert\ptexinsert
|
||
\let\insert\saveinsert
|
||
\else
|
||
\let\checkinserts\relax
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
|
||
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\saveinsert#1{%
|
||
\edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
||
\afterassignment\next
|
||
% swallow the left brace
|
||
\let\temp =
|
||
}
|
||
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
|
||
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
|
||
|
||
\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
|
||
|
||
\def\placesaveins#1{%
|
||
\ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
|
||
{\box#1}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
|
||
{
|
||
\def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
|
||
\gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% initialization:
|
||
\def\newsaveins #1{%
|
||
\edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
||
\next
|
||
}
|
||
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
|
||
\csname newbox\endcsname #1%
|
||
\expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
|
||
\checksaveins #1}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% initialize:
|
||
\let\checkinserts\empty
|
||
\newsaveins\footins
|
||
\newsaveins\margin
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
||
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
||
%
|
||
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
||
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
||
% undone and the next image would fail.
|
||
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
||
\ifeof 1 \else
|
||
% Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
|
||
% doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
|
||
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
|
||
\input epsf.tex
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
%
|
||
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
||
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
||
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
||
work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
||
it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.}
|
||
%
|
||
\def\image#1{%
|
||
\ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
|
||
\ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
||
\errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
||
\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
||
\global\warnednoepsftrue
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% Arguments to @image:
|
||
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
||
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
||
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
|
||
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
|
||
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
|
||
\newif\ifimagevmode
|
||
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
|
||
\normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
|
||
\def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro
|
||
% If the image is by itself, center it.
|
||
\ifvmode
|
||
\imagevmodetrue
|
||
\else \ifx\centersub\centerV
|
||
% for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
|
||
\imagevmodetrue
|
||
\vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
|
||
\fi\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\ifimagevmode
|
||
\nobreak\medskip
|
||
% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
|
||
% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
|
||
% above and below.
|
||
\nobreak\vskip\parskip
|
||
\nobreak
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
|
||
% environment such as @quotation is respected.
|
||
% However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
|
||
% normal paragraph indentation.
|
||
% On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
|
||
% want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
|
||
% eradicate the centering.
|
||
\ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Output the image.
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
% For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80
|
||
\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
||
% For epsf.tex
|
||
% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
||
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
||
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
||
\epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
||
\else
|
||
% For XeTeX
|
||
\doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\ifimagevmode
|
||
\medskip % space after a standalone image
|
||
\fi
|
||
\ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
|
||
% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
|
||
% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
|
||
%
|
||
\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
|
||
|
||
% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
|
||
\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
|
||
|
||
% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
|
||
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
|
||
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
|
||
%
|
||
% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
|
||
% be referable.
|
||
%
|
||
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
|
||
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
|
||
%
|
||
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
|
||
% chapter-level command.
|
||
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
|
||
%
|
||
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
|
||
\let\thiscaption=\empty
|
||
\let\thisshortcaption=\empty
|
||
%
|
||
% don't lose footnotes inside @float.
|
||
%
|
||
% BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
|
||
% insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
|
||
%
|
||
\startsavinginserts
|
||
%
|
||
% We can't be used inside a paragraph.
|
||
\par
|
||
%
|
||
\vtop\bgroup
|
||
\def\floattype{#1}%
|
||
\def\floatlabel{#2}%
|
||
\def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\floattype\empty
|
||
\let\safefloattype=\empty
|
||
\else
|
||
{%
|
||
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
||
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
|
||
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
||
% We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
|
||
% Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
|
||
%
|
||
\expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
|
||
\global\advance\floatno by 1
|
||
%
|
||
{%
|
||
% This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the
|
||
% XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
|
||
% labels (which have a completely different output format) from
|
||
% node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
|
||
% lists of floats.
|
||
%
|
||
\edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
|
||
\setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% start with \parskip glue, I guess.
|
||
\vskip\parskip
|
||
%
|
||
% Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
|
||
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% we have these possibilities:
|
||
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
|
||
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
|
||
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
|
||
% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
|
||
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
|
||
% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
|
||
% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
|
||
% @float & no caption:
|
||
%
|
||
\def\Efloat{%
|
||
\let\floatident = \empty
|
||
%
|
||
% In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
|
||
\ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
|
||
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
||
\ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
|
||
\appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
% the number.
|
||
\appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
|
||
% \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
|
||
\let\captionline = \floatident
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
|
||
\ifx\floatident\empty \else
|
||
\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% caption text.
|
||
\appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
|
||
% Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
|
||
\ifx\captionline\empty \else
|
||
\vskip.5\parskip
|
||
\captionline
|
||
%
|
||
% Space below caption.
|
||
\vskip\parskip
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
|
||
% after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
|
||
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
||
% Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
|
||
% \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
|
||
% caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
|
||
{%
|
||
\requireauxfile
|
||
\atdummies
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
|
||
\def\gtemp{\thiscaption}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
|
||
\ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
|
||
}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\egroup % end of \vtop
|
||
%
|
||
\checkinserts
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
|
||
\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @caption, @shortcaption
|
||
%
|
||
\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
|
||
\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
|
||
\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
|
||
\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
|
||
|
||
% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
|
||
% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
|
||
\def\getfloatno#1{%
|
||
\ifx#1\relax
|
||
% Haven't seen this figure type before.
|
||
\csname newcount\endcsname #1%
|
||
%
|
||
% Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
|
||
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
|
||
\expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\let\floatno#1%
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
|
||
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
|
||
% first read the @float command.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
||
|
||
% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
|
||
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
|
||
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
|
||
|
||
% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
|
||
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
|
||
% \currentsection value which we \setref above.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
|
||
%
|
||
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
|
||
% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
|
||
\def\temp{#1}%
|
||
\def\iffloattype{#2}%
|
||
\ifx\temp\floatmagic
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
|
||
\def\floattype{#1}% floattype
|
||
{%
|
||
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
||
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
||
\indexnofonts
|
||
\turnoffactive
|
||
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
||
}%
|
||
%
|
||
% \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
|
||
\ifhavexrefs
|
||
% if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
|
||
\message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
|
||
\let\do=\listoffloatsdo
|
||
\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
|
||
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
|
||
% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
|
||
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
|
||
%
|
||
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
|
||
% they won't appear in the aux file).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
|
||
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
|
||
% Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
|
||
% pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
|
||
% page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
|
||
% in pdf output.
|
||
\toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
|
||
%
|
||
% use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
|
||
\edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
|
||
\writeentry
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{localization,}
|
||
|
||
% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
|
||
% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
|
||
% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
|
||
%
|
||
{
|
||
\catcode`\_ = \active
|
||
\globaldefs=1
|
||
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
|
||
\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
|
||
% Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
|
||
\let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test
|
||
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
||
\ifeof 1
|
||
\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish
|
||
\else
|
||
\globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
|
||
\input txi-#1.tex
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
\endgroup % end raw TeX
|
||
}
|
||
%
|
||
% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
|
||
% try txi-de.tex.
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
|
||
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
||
\ifeof 1
|
||
\errhelp = \nolanghelp
|
||
\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
|
||
\input txi-#1.tex
|
||
\fi
|
||
\closein 1
|
||
}
|
||
}% end of special _ catcode
|
||
%
|
||
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
|
||
is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
|
||
directory should work if nowhere else does.}
|
||
|
||
% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
|
||
% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
|
||
% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
|
||
%
|
||
% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
|
||
% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
|
||
% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
|
||
%
|
||
% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
|
||
% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
|
||
% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
|
||
% accented characters problem.)
|
||
%
|
||
\catcode`@=11
|
||
\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
|
||
% do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
|
||
\message{no patterns for #1}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
|
||
\fi
|
||
% but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
|
||
\global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
|
||
\global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively.
|
||
% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation.
|
||
% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise.
|
||
%
|
||
\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable
|
||
\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio
|
||
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
||
\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
|
||
\txinativeunicodecapablefalse
|
||
\txiusebytewiseiotrue
|
||
\else
|
||
\txinativeunicodecapabletrue
|
||
\txiusebytewiseiofalse
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\txinativeunicodecapabletrue
|
||
\txiusebytewiseiofalse
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex
|
||
% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setbytewiseio{%
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
||
\else
|
||
\XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read
|
||
\XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file
|
||
% Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for
|
||
% output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files.
|
||
% The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in
|
||
% place of non-ASCII characters.
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
|
||
\else
|
||
\directlua{
|
||
local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub
|
||
local function convert_char (char)
|
||
return utf8_char(byte(char))
|
||
end
|
||
|
||
local function convert_line (line)
|
||
return gsub(line, ".", convert_char)
|
||
end
|
||
|
||
callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line)
|
||
|
||
local function convert_line_out (line)
|
||
local line_out = ""
|
||
for c in string.utfvalues(line) do
|
||
line_out = line_out .. string.char(c)
|
||
end
|
||
return line_out
|
||
end
|
||
|
||
callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out)
|
||
}
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
\txiusebytewiseiotrue
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Helpers for encodings.
|
||
% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
|
||
\count255=128
|
||
\loop\ifnum\count255<256
|
||
\global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
|
||
\advance\count255 by 1
|
||
\repeat
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
|
||
\count255=128
|
||
\loop\ifnum\count255<256
|
||
\catcode\count255=#1\relax
|
||
\advance\count255 by 1
|
||
\repeat
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
|
||
% according to the specified encoding.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz}
|
||
\def\documentencodingzzz#1{%
|
||
%
|
||
% Encoding being declared for the document.
|
||
\def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
|
||
% to compare them with \ifx.
|
||
\def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
|
||
\def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
|
||
\def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
|
||
\def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
|
||
\def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
|
||
\asciichardefs
|
||
%
|
||
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
|
||
\iftxinativeunicodecapable
|
||
\setbytewiseio
|
||
\fi
|
||
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
||
\lattwochardefs
|
||
%
|
||
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
|
||
\iftxinativeunicodecapable
|
||
\setbytewiseio
|
||
\fi
|
||
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
||
\latonechardefs
|
||
%
|
||
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
|
||
\iftxinativeunicodecapable
|
||
\setbytewiseio
|
||
\fi
|
||
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
||
\latninechardefs
|
||
%
|
||
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
||
\iftxinativeunicodecapable
|
||
% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX)
|
||
\nativeunicodechardefs
|
||
\else
|
||
% For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX)
|
||
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
||
% since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level
|
||
% (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated
|
||
% definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is
|
||
% sufficient.
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\else
|
||
\message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}%
|
||
%
|
||
\fi % utfeight
|
||
\fi % latnine
|
||
\fi % latone
|
||
\fi % lattwo
|
||
\fi % ascii
|
||
%
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
|
||
\else
|
||
\message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle %
|
||
non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% emacs-page
|
||
% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
|
||
% the default font encoding (OT1).
|
||
%
|
||
\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}}
|
||
|
||
% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
|
||
\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
|
||
|
||
% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
|
||
% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
|
||
% macros containing the character definitions.
|
||
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
||
%
|
||
|
||
\def\gdefchar#1#2{%
|
||
\gdef#1{%
|
||
\ifpassthroughchars
|
||
\string#1%
|
||
\else
|
||
#2%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
|
||
\def\latonechardefs{%
|
||
\gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent
|
||
\gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency
|
||
\gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen
|
||
\gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar
|
||
\gdefchar^^a7{\S}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^aa{\ordf}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ad{\-}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^af{\={}}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b2{$^2$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b3{$^3$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b6{\P}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
|
||
\gdefchar^^b9{$^1$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ba{\ordm}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^c0{\`A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c3{\~A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c6{\AE}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c8{\`E}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ca{\^E}
|
||
\gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
|
||
\gdefchar^^cc{\`I}
|
||
\gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
|
||
\gdefchar^^cf{\"I}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d1{\~N}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d2{\`O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d5{\~O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d8{\O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d9{\`U}
|
||
\gdefchar^^da{\'U}
|
||
\gdefchar^^db{\^U}
|
||
\gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
|
||
\gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
|
||
\gdefchar^^de{\TH}
|
||
\gdefchar^^df{\ss}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^e0{\`a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e3{\~a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e6{\ae}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e8{\`e}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ea{\^e}
|
||
\gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f1{\~n}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f2{\`o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f5{\~o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f8{\o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f9{\`u}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fb{\^u}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fe{\th}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ff{\"y}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
|
||
\def\latninechardefs{%
|
||
% Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
|
||
\latonechardefs
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a6{\v S}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a8{\v s}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b4{\v Z}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b8{\v z}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bc{\OE}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bd{\oe}
|
||
\gdefchar^^be{\"Y}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
|
||
\def\lattwochardefs{%
|
||
\gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a2{\u{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a3{\L}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a5{\v L}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a6{\'S}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a7{\S}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^a9{\v S}
|
||
\gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ab{\v T}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ac{\'Z}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ad{\-}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ae{\v Z}
|
||
\gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b3{\l}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b5{\v l}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b6{\'s}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b7{\v{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
|
||
\gdefchar^^b9{\v s}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bb{\v t}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bc{\'z}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bd{\H{}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^be{\v z}
|
||
\gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^c0{\'R}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c3{\u A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c5{\'L}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c6{\'C}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c8{\v C}
|
||
\gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
|
||
\gdefchar^^cc{\v E}
|
||
\gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
|
||
\gdefchar^^cf{\v D}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d1{\'N}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d2{\v N}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d5{\H O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d8{\v R}
|
||
\gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U}
|
||
\gdefchar^^da{\'U}
|
||
\gdefchar^^db{\H U}
|
||
\gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
|
||
\gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
|
||
\gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T}
|
||
\gdefchar^^df{\ss}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^e0{\'r}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e3{\u a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e5{\'l}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e6{\'c}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e8{\v c}
|
||
\gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ec{\v e}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ef{\v d}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f1{\'n}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f2{\v n}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f5{\H o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f8{\v r}
|
||
\gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fb{\H u}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
|
||
\gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t}
|
||
\gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% UTF-8 character definitions.
|
||
%
|
||
% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
|
||
% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
|
||
% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
|
||
%
|
||
\newcount\countUTFx
|
||
\newcount\countUTFy
|
||
\newcount\countUTFz
|
||
|
||
\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
|
||
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
|
||
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
|
||
%
|
||
\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
|
||
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
|
||
|
||
\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
|
||
\ifx #1\relax
|
||
\message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\expandafter #1%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\~13
|
||
\catcode`\$12
|
||
\catcode`\"12
|
||
|
||
% Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp
|
||
% substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value.
|
||
\def\UTFviiiLoop{%
|
||
\global\catcode\countUTFx\active
|
||
\uccode`\~\countUTFx
|
||
\uccode`\$\countUTFx
|
||
\uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
|
||
\advance\countUTFx by 1
|
||
\ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
|
||
\expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
|
||
\fi}
|
||
|
||
% For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to
|
||
% be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files.
|
||
\countUTFx = "80
|
||
\countUTFy = "C2
|
||
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
||
\gdef~{%
|
||
\ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}%
|
||
\UTFviiiLoop
|
||
|
||
\countUTFx = "C2
|
||
\countUTFy = "E0
|
||
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
||
\gdef~{%
|
||
\ifpassthroughchars $%
|
||
\else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
|
||
\UTFviiiLoop
|
||
|
||
\countUTFx = "E0
|
||
\countUTFy = "F0
|
||
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
||
\gdef~{%
|
||
\ifpassthroughchars $%
|
||
\else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
|
||
\UTFviiiLoop
|
||
|
||
\countUTFx = "F0
|
||
\countUTFy = "F4
|
||
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
||
\gdef~{%
|
||
\ifpassthroughchars $%
|
||
\else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi
|
||
}}%
|
||
\UTFviiiLoop
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
|
||
\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below
|
||
|
||
% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it.
|
||
\def\U#1{%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax
|
||
\iftxinativeunicodecapable
|
||
% All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is
|
||
% active. However, if the font does not have the glyph,
|
||
% letters are missing.
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\uccode`\.="#1\relax
|
||
\uppercase{.}
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
\else
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
\else
|
||
\csname uni:#1\endcsname
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control
|
||
% sequence to be defined.
|
||
\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{%
|
||
\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}%
|
||
\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{%
|
||
\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}%
|
||
\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{%
|
||
\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}%
|
||
|
||
% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX),
|
||
% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character;
|
||
% this gets used by the @U command
|
||
%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\catcode`\"=12
|
||
\catcode`\<=12
|
||
\catcode`\.=12
|
||
\catcode`\,=12
|
||
\catcode`\;=12
|
||
\catcode`\!=12
|
||
\catcode`\~=13
|
||
\gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{%
|
||
\countUTFz = "#1\relax
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\parseXMLCharref
|
||
|
||
% Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's
|
||
% expands after the \gdef three times, e.g.
|
||
%
|
||
% 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2
|
||
% 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname
|
||
% 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token)
|
||
%
|
||
\expandafter\expandafter
|
||
\expandafter\expandafter
|
||
\expandafter\expandafter
|
||
\expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
|
||
%
|
||
\expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else
|
||
\message{Internal error, already defined: #1}%
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
% define an additional control sequence for this code point.
|
||
\expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp
|
||
\endgroup}
|
||
%
|
||
% Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp
|
||
% to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence.
|
||
\gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
|
||
\ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
|
||
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
||
\errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
|
||
\else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
|
||
\parseUTFviiiA,%
|
||
\parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,%
|
||
\else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
|
||
\parseUTFviiiA;%
|
||
\parseUTFviiiA,%
|
||
\parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\parseUTFviiiA;%
|
||
\parseUTFviiiA,%
|
||
\parseUTFviiiA!%
|
||
\parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}%
|
||
\fi\fi\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx.
|
||
% It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence.
|
||
% Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one
|
||
% of the bytes.
|
||
\gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
|
||
\countUTFx = \countUTFz
|
||
\divide\countUTFz by 64
|
||
\countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz.
|
||
\multiply\countUTFz by 64
|
||
|
||
% \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract
|
||
% in order to get the last five bits.
|
||
\advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
|
||
|
||
% Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence.
|
||
\advance\countUTFx by 128
|
||
\uccode `#1\countUTFx
|
||
\countUTFz = \countUTFy}
|
||
|
||
% Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp
|
||
% #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8
|
||
% sequence.
|
||
% #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros.
|
||
% #3 is always a full stop (.)
|
||
% #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these
|
||
% bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's.
|
||
\gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
|
||
\advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
|
||
\uccode `#3\countUTFz
|
||
\uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
|
||
% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
|
||
% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally
|
||
%
|
||
\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{%
|
||
\catcode"#1=\other
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M
|
||
% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block)
|
||
% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block)
|
||
% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A
|
||
% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B
|
||
%
|
||
% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing
|
||
% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts
|
||
% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without
|
||
% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years,
|
||
% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else.
|
||
% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at
|
||
% least make most of the characters not bomb out.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\unicodechardefs{%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02BC}{'}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Greek letters upper case
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}%
|
||
%\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Vowels with accents
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Standalone accent
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Greek letters lower case
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}%
|
||
%
|
||
% More Greek vowels with accents
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Variant Greek letters
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Punctuation
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Mathematical symbols
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}%
|
||
%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}%
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}%
|
||
%
|
||
\global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign
|
||
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}%
|
||
}% end of \unicodechardefs
|
||
|
||
% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command)
|
||
% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence.
|
||
\def\utfeightchardefs{%
|
||
\let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii
|
||
\unicodechardefs
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to
|
||
% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to
|
||
% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for
|
||
% printing the correct glyphs.
|
||
\newif\ifpassthroughchars
|
||
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
||
|
||
% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
|
||
% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character
|
||
%
|
||
\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{%
|
||
\catcode"#1=\active
|
||
\def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{%
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\uccode`\~="##2\relax
|
||
\uppercase{\gdef~}{%
|
||
\ifpassthroughchars
|
||
##1%
|
||
\else
|
||
##3%
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}
|
||
\begingroup
|
||
\uccode`\.="#1\relax
|
||
\uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}%
|
||
\expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}%
|
||
\endgroup
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition.
|
||
% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters.
|
||
\def\nativeunicodechardefs{%
|
||
\let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative
|
||
\unicodechardefs
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
|
||
% make the character token expand
|
||
% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing.
|
||
\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{%
|
||
\def\UTFAtUTmp{#2}
|
||
\expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX).
|
||
\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{%
|
||
\let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU
|
||
\unicodechardefs
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% US-ASCII character definitions.
|
||
\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
|
||
\relax
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Define all Unicode characters we know about. This makes UTF-8 the default
|
||
% input encoding and allows @U to work.
|
||
\iftxinativeunicodecapable
|
||
\nativeunicodechardefsatu
|
||
\else
|
||
\utfeightchardefs
|
||
\fi
|
||
|
||
\message{formatting,}
|
||
|
||
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
||
|
||
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
||
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
||
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
||
|
||
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
||
\vbadness = 10000
|
||
|
||
% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
|
||
\hbadness = 6666
|
||
|
||
% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
|
||
\widowpenalty=10000
|
||
\clubpenalty=10000
|
||
|
||
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
||
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
||
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
||
% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\setemergencystretch{%
|
||
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
||
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
||
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\emergencystretch = .15\hsize
|
||
\fi
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
|
||
% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
|
||
% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
|
||
%
|
||
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
|
||
% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
|
||
\voffset = #3\relax
|
||
\topskip = #6\relax
|
||
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
||
%
|
||
\vsize = #1\relax
|
||
\advance\vsize by \topskip
|
||
\outervsize = \vsize
|
||
\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
|
||
\txipageheight = \vsize
|
||
%
|
||
\hsize = #2\relax
|
||
\outerhsize = \hsize
|
||
\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
||
\txipagewidth = \hsize
|
||
%
|
||
\normaloffset = #4\relax
|
||
\bindingoffset = #5\relax
|
||
%
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
\pdfpageheight #7\relax
|
||
\pdfpagewidth #8\relax
|
||
% if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
|
||
% whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
|
||
\pdfhorigin = 1 true in
|
||
\pdfvorigin = 1 true in
|
||
\else
|
||
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
||
\special{papersize=#8,#7}%
|
||
\else
|
||
\pdfpageheight #7\relax
|
||
\pdfpagewidth #8\relax
|
||
% XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin.
|
||
\fi
|
||
\fi
|
||
%
|
||
\setleading{\textleading}
|
||
%
|
||
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
||
\setemergencystretch
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% @letterpaper (the default).
|
||
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
||
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
||
\textleading = 13.2pt
|
||
%
|
||
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
|
||
\internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
|
||
{\voffset}{.25in}%
|
||
{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
|
||
{11in}{8.5in}%
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
|
||
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
||
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
|
||
\textleading = 12pt
|
||
%
|
||
\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
|
||
{-.2in}{0in}%
|
||
{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
|
||
{9.25in}{7in}%
|
||
%
|
||
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
||
\tolerance = 700
|
||
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
||
\defbodyindent = .5cm
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
|
||
% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
|
||
\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
||
\parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
|
||
\textleading = 12pt
|
||
%
|
||
\internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
|
||
{-.2in}{-.4in}%
|
||
{0pt}{14pt}%
|
||
{9in}{6in}%
|
||
%
|
||
\lispnarrowing = 0.25in
|
||
\tolerance = 700
|
||
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
||
\defbodyindent = .4cm
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
||
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
||
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
||
\textleading = 13.2pt
|
||
%
|
||
% Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
|
||
% prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
|
||
% To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
|
||
% \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
|
||
% do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
|
||
% your texinfo source file like this:
|
||
% @tex
|
||
% \global\normaloffset = -6mm
|
||
% \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
|
||
% @end tex
|
||
\internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
|
||
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
||
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
||
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
||
%
|
||
\tolerance = 700
|
||
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
||
\defbodyindent = 5mm
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
|
||
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
|
||
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
|
||
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
||
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
|
||
\textleading = 12.5pt
|
||
%
|
||
\internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
|
||
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
||
{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
|
||
{210mm}{148mm}%
|
||
%
|
||
\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
|
||
\tolerance = 800
|
||
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
||
\defbodyindent = 2mm
|
||
\tableindent = 12mm
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
|
||
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
|
||
\afourpaper
|
||
\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
|
||
{\voffset}{4.6mm}%
|
||
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
||
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
||
%
|
||
% Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
|
||
\globaldefs = 0
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
|
||
\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
|
||
\afourpaper
|
||
\internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
|
||
{\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
|
||
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
||
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
||
\globaldefs = 0
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
\def\bsixpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
||
\afourpaper
|
||
\internalpagesizes{140mm}{100mm}%
|
||
{-6.35mm}{-12.7mm}%
|
||
{\bindingoffset}{14pt}%
|
||
{176mm}{125mm}%
|
||
\let\SETdispenvsize=\smallword
|
||
\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
|
||
\globaldefs = 0
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
|
||
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
|
||
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
|
||
%
|
||
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
|
||
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
|
||
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
|
||
\globaldefs = 1
|
||
%
|
||
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
||
\setleading{\textleading}%
|
||
%
|
||
\dimen0 = #1\relax
|
||
\advance\dimen0 by 2.5in % default 1in margin above heading line
|
||
% and 1.5in to include heading, footing and
|
||
% bottom margin
|
||
%
|
||
\dimen2 = \hsize
|
||
\advance\dimen2 by 2in % default to 1 inch margin on each side
|
||
%
|
||
\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
|
||
{\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
|
||
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
||
{\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
% Set default to letter.
|
||
%
|
||
\letterpaper
|
||
|
||
% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes.
|
||
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
||
|
||
|
||
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
||
|
||
\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
|
||
|
||
% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
|
||
\catcode`\^^? = 14
|
||
|
||
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
||
\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
||
\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
|
||
\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
|
||
\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
|
||
\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
|
||
\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
|
||
\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
|
||
\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
||
\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
|
||
|
||
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
|
||
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
|
||
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
||
%
|
||
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
||
% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
||
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
||
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
||
%
|
||
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
||
|
||
% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
|
||
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
|
||
% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
|
||
% this is not a problem.
|
||
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
||
|
||
% Set catcodes for Texinfo file
|
||
|
||
% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph.
|
||
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
||
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
||
%
|
||
\catcode`\"=\active
|
||
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
|
||
\let"=\activedoublequote
|
||
\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
|
||
\chardef\hatchar=`\^
|
||
\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat
|
||
|
||
\catcode`\_=\active
|
||
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
||
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
|
||
\let\realunder=_
|
||
|
||
\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}}
|
||
|
||
\chardef \less=`\<
|
||
\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
|
||
\chardef \gtr=`\>
|
||
\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
|
||
\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
||
\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
|
||
\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash
|
||
|
||
|
||
% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
|
||
% breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
|
||
\def\texinfochars{%
|
||
\let< = \activeless
|
||
\let> = \activegtr
|
||
\let~ = \activetilde
|
||
\let^ = \activehat
|
||
\markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault
|
||
\let\b = \strong
|
||
\let\i = \smartitalic
|
||
% in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
|
||
% parsing them.
|
||
\def\turnoffactive{%
|
||
\normalturnoffactive
|
||
\otherbackslash
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
\catcode`\@=0
|
||
|
||
% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
|
||
% as in \char`\\.
|
||
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
|
||
|
||
% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
|
||
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
|
||
|
||
% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
|
||
% in fixed width font.
|
||
\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
|
||
|
||
% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use
|
||
% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char
|
||
% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol
|
||
% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex
|
||
% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
|
||
% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
|
||
% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
|
||
% usual hex value because it has already been made active.
|
||
|
||
@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
|
||
@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
|
||
|
||
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
|
||
% catcode other.
|
||
@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
|
||
|
||
% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
|
||
% the literal character `\'.
|
||
%
|
||
{@catcode`- = @active
|
||
@gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
|
||
@passthroughcharstrue
|
||
@let-=@normaldash
|
||
@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
||
@let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
|
||
@let+=@normalplus
|
||
@let<=@normalless
|
||
@let>=@normalgreater
|
||
@let^=@normalcaret
|
||
@let_=@normalunderscore
|
||
@let|=@normalverticalbar
|
||
@let~=@normaltilde
|
||
@let\=@ttbackslash
|
||
@markupsetuplqdefault
|
||
@markupsetuprqdefault
|
||
@unsepspaces
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
||
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
||
% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on.
|
||
@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other
|
||
|
||
% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo'
|
||
%
|
||
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
||
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
||
% a backslash.
|
||
% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after
|
||
% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error.
|
||
% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex.
|
||
% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden.
|
||
{
|
||
@catcode`@^=7
|
||
@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{%
|
||
@global@let\ = @eatinput%
|
||
@catcode`@^^M=13%
|
||
@def@c{@fixbackslash@c}%
|
||
% Definition for the newline at the end of this file.
|
||
@def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}%
|
||
% Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file.
|
||
@gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}%
|
||
% In case the first line has a whole-line command on it
|
||
@let@originalparsearg@parsearg
|
||
@def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg}
|
||
}}
|
||
|
||
{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13%
|
||
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}}
|
||
|
||
% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token
|
||
% appears by mistake.
|
||
{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13%
|
||
@gdef@enableemergencynewline{%
|
||
@gdef^^M{%
|
||
@par%
|
||
%<warning: active newline>@par%
|
||
}}}
|
||
|
||
|
||
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
|
||
@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi
|
||
@catcode13=5 % regular end of line
|
||
@enableemergencynewline
|
||
@let@c=@comment
|
||
@let@parsearg@originalparsearg
|
||
% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
|
||
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
||
@catcode`+=@active
|
||
@catcode`@_=@active
|
||
%
|
||
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
||
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets
|
||
% called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf
|
||
% directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format
|
||
% file for Texinfo.
|
||
%
|
||
@openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
||
@ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi
|
||
@closein 1
|
||
}
|
||
|
||
|
||
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
||
@escapechar = `@@
|
||
|
||
% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
|
||
% active definitions as the normal characters.
|
||
@def@normaldot{.}
|
||
@def@normalquest{?}
|
||
@def@normalslash{/}
|
||
|
||
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
|
||
% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
|
||
@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
|
||
@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
|
||
@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
|
||
|
||
@let @hashchar = @normalhash
|
||
|
||
@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
|
||
@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
|
||
@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
|
||
@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
|
||
@catcode`@'=@active
|
||
@catcode`@`=@active
|
||
@markupsetuplqdefault
|
||
@markupsetuprqdefault
|
||
|
||
@c Local variables:
|
||
@c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp)
|
||
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page"
|
||
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
|
||
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
|
||
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
|
||
@c End:
|
||
|
||
@c vim:sw=2:
|
||
|
||
@enablebackslashhack
|